Brother Fax Machine MFC7150C User Manual

MFC 7150C  
MFC 7160C  
®
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IfYou Need to Call Customer Service  
Please complete the following information for future  
reference:  
Model Number: MFC 7150C MFC 7160C  
(Circle your model number)  
Serial Number:*  
Date of Purchase:  
Place of Purchase:  
*The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain this  
Owner’sManualwithyour salesreceipt asapermanent  
record of your purchase, in the event of a theft, fire or  
warranty service.  
Year 2000 Compliant  
Brother is addressing theYear 2000 related issues for all  
Brother fax machines and multi-function centers. Our  
focus is to ensure that our bundled third party software  
will continue to properly process date/time data after  
January 1, 2000.  
Brother fax machines and multi-function centers will  
function properly after January 1, 2000, provided that all  
non-Brother hardware, software and firmware used by  
our customers in connection or combination with Brother  
fax machines, MFCs and bundled software, accurately  
exchange date data with the Brother products.  
Please continue to check our Web page for updates at  
http://www.brother.com. All remedies will be provided  
to individual customers via software patches through  
software download or from Brother Customer Service.  
© 1996–1998 Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ii  
Ordering Accessories and Supplies  
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, available at most Brother retailers. If  
you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, or American  
Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (In the USA, you can visit us  
online for a complete selection of Brother accessories and supplies available for purchase.  
USA: 1-888-879-3232 (voice)  
1-800-947-1445 (fax)  
From within Canada: 1-800-668-2768 (voice)  
http://www.brothermall.com  
Description  
Item  
Ink Cartridge <black>  
Ink Cartridge <cyan>(blue)  
Ink Cartridge <magenta>(red)  
Ink Cartridge <yellow>  
360 dpi High Quality Coated Paper  
720 dpi High Quality Coated Paper  
Glossy Paper  
LC02BK  
LC02C  
LC02M  
LC02Y  
BP36CL  
BP72CL  
BPGLL  
BPTRL  
HD002  
Transparancies  
Print Head  
2MB Upgrade Memory Board (For MFC 7160C Only)  
Power Protector  
ME2000  
QPD120  
*Brother MFC-7100 Series Software on floppy disks  
(Includes MFL Pro and Visioneer PaperPort LE Only)  
DSK7131, (Floppy Disks Windows® 3.1 or 3.11  
)
DSK7195, (Floppy Disks Windows® 95 or 98  
)
Telephone Line Cord  
(For USA) UG1570001  
(For Canada) UG3565001  
Telephone Handset  
Handset Curled Cord  
Dust Cover  
UF6857003  
UF7204009  
UU1481001  
UU1309001  
UU1309001  
UU1248001  
UU1289001  
UG4558001  
UU1301001  
UU1300001  
Paper Wire Extension  
Document Wire Extension  
Document Tray  
Paper Tray  
IEEE-1284 Bi-directional Cable  
Remote Control Access Card  
Reference Guide  
Owner’s Manual  
(For USA) UU1298001  
(For Canada) UU1401001  
*Software on Floppy disks is not available for Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0.  
Brother Coated Paper is Ink Jet Paper.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Table of Contents  
Introduction  
Using This Manual ...................................................................................................... 1  
Finding Information .................................................................................................... 1  
Test sheet Procedures (For USA Only) ................................................................... 2  
About Fax Machines ................................................................................................... 2  
Fax Tones and Handshake .......................................................................................... 2  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) ................................................................................... 3  
MFC 7150C Control Panel Overview ..................................................................... 4  
MFC 7160C Control Panel Overview ..................................................................... 5  
1
MFC Setup and  
Connections  
2
Caution ........................................................................................................................... 7  
Packing List .................................................................................................................. 8  
Choosing a Location.................................................................................................... 9  
Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 10  
Installing the Ink Cartridges ..................................................................................... 15  
Special Line Considerations ..................................................................................... 19  
Roll Over Phone Lines ....................................................................................... 19  
Two-Line Phone System..................................................................................... 19  
Converting Telephone Wall Outlets .................................................................... 20  
Installing MFC, External Two-Line TAD, and Two-Line Telephone ................. 20  
Multi-Line Connections (PBX) ................................................................................ 21  
If you are installing the MFC to work with a PBX: ....................................... 21  
Custom Features on a Single Line ............................................................................ 22  
Connecting an External Telephone Answering Device (TAD) ................................. 22  
Sequence ............................................................................................................. 22  
Connections ........................................................................................................ 23  
Outgoing Message (OGM) ................................................................................. 23  
Connecting an External Telephone ........................................................................... 23  
Paper  
About Brother Paper ................................................................................................ 25  
Paper Specifications for Cassette and Manual Feed Slot ......................................... 26  
Print Area .................................................................................................................. 27  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
iv  
On-Screen  
User-Friendly Programming................................................................................... 29  
Programming  
4
5
Function Mode .......................................................................................................... 29  
Alternating Displays ................................................................................................. 30  
Function Selection Table........................................................................................... 30  
Initial  
Setup  
Getting Started ........................................................................................................... 35  
Setting Dialing Mode (Tone/Pulse) .......................................................................... 35  
Setting Date and Time............................................................................................... 36  
Setting Station ID...................................................................................................... 36  
Entering Text ...................................................................................................... 37  
Inserting spaces .............................................................................................. 37  
Making corrections ........................................................................................ 37  
Repeating letters............................................................................................. 38  
Special characters and symbols ..................................................................... 38  
Setting Beeper Volume.............................................................................................. 39  
Setting the Handset Volume ...................................................................................... 39  
Setting the Speaker Volume (For MFC 7160C Only) ............................................... 39  
Setting the Ring Volume ........................................................................................... 40  
Memory Storage ....................................................................................................... 40  
Delayed Timer........................................................................................................... 40  
Setup  
Receive  
6
Basic Receiving Operations ..................................................................................... 41  
Setting the Select Answer Mode ............................................................................... 41  
To select or change your Answer Mode ............................................................. 42  
Setting Ring Delay .................................................................................................... 42  
Setting F/T Ring Time (For FAX/TEL Mode Only)................................................. 43  
Record F/T OGM (FAX/TEL Outgoing Message)  
(For MFC 7160C Only) ......................................................................................... 44  
Easy Receive ............................................................................................................. 44  
Printing a Reduced Incoming Document .................................................................. 45  
Recommended Reductions ................................................................................. 45  
Setting Paper Size ..................................................................................................... 46  
Advanced Receiving Operations ............................................................................ 47  
Operation from Extension Telephone ....................................................................... 47  
For FAX/TEL Mode Only .................................................................................. 47  
Changing Remote Codes .................................................................................... 47  
Printing a Fax in Memory (For MFC 7150C Only).................................................. 48  
Polling ....................................................................................................................... 48  
Setting Up Polling Receive ................................................................................ 49  
Setting Up Sequential Polling Receive............................................................... 50  
Canceling a Scheduled Job ....................................................................................... 51  
Distinctive Ringing ................................................................................................... 51  
Registering the Distinctive Ringing Pattern ....................................................... 52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
v
Caller ID ................................................................................................................... 53  
Viewing Caller ID List ....................................................................................... 53  
Clearing a Caller ID Stored in Memory ............................................................. 54  
Printing Caller ID List ........................................................................................ 54  
Setup  
Send  
Before You Begin ........................................................................................................ 55  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) ........................................................................ 56  
Resolution ................................................................................................................. 56  
Manual Transmission ................................................................................................ 57  
Automatic Transmission ........................................................................................... 57  
Manual and Automatic Fax Redial ........................................................................... 57  
Dual Access............................................................................................................... 57  
Real Time Transmission............................................................................................ 58  
Checking Job Status .................................................................................................. 58  
Canceling Jobs in Memory ....................................................................................... 58  
Basic Sending Operations ........................................................................................ 59  
Composing Electronic Cover Page ........................................................................... 59  
Cover Page for Next Fax Only ........................................................................... 60  
Always Send Cover Page ................................................................................... 61  
Using a Printed Cover Page................................................................................ 62  
Cover Page Message ................................................................................................. 62  
Composing Your Own Comments ...................................................................... 62  
Contrast ..................................................................................................................... 63  
Advanced Sending Operations ............................................................................... 64  
Overseas Mode ......................................................................................................... 64  
Call Reservation ........................................................................................................ 65  
Print Sample Call Back Message .............................................................................. 66  
Delayed FAX ............................................................................................................ 66  
Broadcasting ............................................................................................................. 67  
Multiple Resolution Transmission ............................................................................ 68  
Setting Up for Polling Transmit ................................................................................ 69  
Interrupting Delayed Fax and Polling Transmit Jobs ............................................... 70  
7
Setup Auto Dial  
Numbers  
Storing Numbers for Easy Dialing ........................................................................ 71  
Storing One Touch Dial Numbers............................................................................. 71  
Storing Speed Dial Numbers .................................................................................... 73  
Changing One Touch and  
8
Speed Dial Numbers .............................................................................................. 74  
Setting Up Groups for Broadcasting......................................................................... 75  
Telephone  
Dialing Options .......................................................................................................... 77  
Manual Dialing ......................................................................................................... 77  
One Touch Dialing .................................................................................................... 78  
(
)
Voice  
9
Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
vi  
Speed Dialing ............................................................................................................ 78  
Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers .................................................................. 79  
Hold .......................................................................................................................... 79  
Pause ......................................................................................................................... 79  
Tone/Pulse ................................................................................................................. 80  
Searching Telephone Index ....................................................................................... 80  
Answering Calls with the Speaker Phone (For MFC 7160C Only) ......................... 80  
Remote Fax  
Options  
Fax Forwarding/Paging ........................................................................................... 81  
Programming a Fax Forwarding Number ................................................................. 81  
Programming Paging Number .................................................................................. 82  
Setting Fax Storage ................................................................................................... 83  
Changing Remote Access Code .............................................................................. 84  
Remote Retrieval ....................................................................................................... 85  
Using Remote Access Code ...................................................................................... 85  
Remote Commands ................................................................................................... 86  
Retrieving Memory Status List ................................................................................. 87  
Retrieving Fax Messages .......................................................................................... 87  
Changing Fax Forwarding Number .......................................................................... 88  
10  
(For MFC 7150C Only)  
Printing  
Reports  
MFC Settings and Activity ...................................................................................... 89  
To Print a Report ....................................................................................................... 90  
Transmission Verification (Xmit) Report .................................................................. 90  
Activity Report Interval ............................................................................................ 90  
11  
Message Center  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
12  
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 91  
Message Center Mode .............................................................................................. 91  
Flexible Memory Settings (Message Storage) .......................................................... 92  
Setting Up Message Center....................................................................................... 92  
Setting Message Storage ........................................................................................... 93  
Recording Message Center Outgoing Message (OGM) ........................................... 93  
Listening to Outgoing Message (OGM) ............................................................. 94  
Erasing Outgoing Message (OGM) .................................................................... 94  
Activating Message Center Mode ............................................................................. 94  
Message Indicators ................................................................................................... 94  
Playing Voice Messages and Memos ........................................................................ 95  
Printing a Fax Message ............................................................................................. 95  
Backup Printing Option ............................................................................................ 96  
Erasing Messages ...................................................................................................... 96  
To erase voice messages individually ............................................................ 96  
To erase messages all at once......................................................................... 97  
Setting Maximum Time for Incoming Messages...................................................... 97  
Setting Toll Saver ...................................................................................................... 98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
vii  
ICM Recording Monitor ........................................................................................... 98  
Recording a Memo.................................................................................................... 98  
Recording a Conversation ......................................................................................... 99  
Fax Forwarding/Paging ............................................................................................. 99  
Programming a Fax Forwarding Number ........................................................... 99  
Programming Paging Number .......................................................................... 100  
Remote Retrieval ..................................................................................................... 101  
Using Remote Access Code .................................................................................... 101  
Changing Remote Access Code .............................................................................. 101  
Remote Control Commands.................................................................................... 102  
Retrieving Memory Status List ............................................................................... 103  
Retrieving Fax Messages ........................................................................................ 103  
Changing Fax Forwarding Number ........................................................................ 104  
Copy  
Basic Copy Operations ........................................................................................... 105  
Copying One Page .................................................................................................. 105  
Making Multiple Copies ......................................................................................... 106  
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies  
Operations  
13  
(Temporary Setting) ............................................................................................. 106  
Copy Quality – Temporary Settings .................................................................... 108  
Using the Copy Quality Key ................................................................................... 108  
Using the Paper Type Key....................................................................................... 109  
Using the Brightness Key ....................................................................................... 110  
Copy Quality – Default Settings ........................................................................... 110  
Changing Default Settings ...................................................................................... 110  
Select Paper Type .................................................................................................... 112  
Select Copy Quality ................................................................................................ 113  
Select Type of Original ........................................................................................... 113  
Color Adjustment .................................................................................................... 114  
Copy Brightness ...................................................................................................... 114  
Copy Contrast ......................................................................................................... 114  
Selecting a Single Color (One Color) ..................................................................... 115  
Memory Full Message ............................................................................................ 116  
Legal Limitations ..................................................................................................... 117  
Walk-Up  
Getting Started ......................................................................................................... 119  
Auto Switch ............................................................................................................ 120  
Color Video Printing ............................................................................................... 120  
Black & White Video Printing .............................................................................. 121  
Video Print Quality – Temporary Settings ........................................................ 121  
Using the Copy Quality Key ................................................................................... 121  
Using the Paper Type Key....................................................................................... 122  
Video Printing  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
viii  
Using the Brightness Key ....................................................................................... 123  
Changing Default Settings ..................................................................................... 124  
Setting Paper Type .................................................................................................. 126  
Setting Video Printing Quality ................................................................................ 126  
Setting Video Type .................................................................................................. 126  
Setting Print Size .................................................................................................... 127  
Video Printing Color Adjustment ........................................................................... 128  
Video Printing Brightness ....................................................................................... 128  
Video Capture to PC ............................................................................................... 128  
Setting Up  
Before You Install Multi-Function Link Pro Software ................................... 129  
If You Don’t Have a CD-ROM Drive ..................................................................... 130  
Computer Requirements ......................................................................................... 130  
Connecting the MFC to the Computer ............................................................... 131  
Installing Multi-Function Link Pro Software (CD-ROM 1) ......................... 132  
Overview of Basic Steps ......................................................................................... 132  
Choosing the Software to Install ............................................................................. 132  
Install Multi-Function Link Pro Software ........................................................ 132  
Install NetCentric™ FaxStorm ......................................................................... 132  
Install Automatic E-Mail Printing .................................................................... 133  
Install 3D FaxSpeed ......................................................................................... 133  
Install MFC 7100 Series Drivers Only ............................................................. 133  
Other Options .......................................................................................................... 133  
View On-Line Documentation ......................................................................... 133  
View Product Support Information .................................................................. 133  
Brother Web Link ............................................................................................. 133  
Exit ................................................................................................................... 133  
Installing the Brother Software ............................................................................... 134  
Helpful Hints for Windows® 3.1, 3.11, 95 and 98 .................................................. 137  
Receiving Messages into the PC ........................................................................... 137  
Multi-Function Link Pro Mode............................................................................... 138  
the MFC and  
15  
Computer to  
Work Together  
Using MFC  
as Printer  
Features ...................................................................................................................... 139  
Printer Driver ........................................................................................................... 140  
Choosing the Right Kind of Paper....................................................................... 140  
Multi-purpose Sheet Feeder .................................................................................. 141  
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 141  
Manual Feed Slot .................................................................................................... 142  
Setup for Envelopes ................................................................................................ 143  
Simultaneous Printing/Fax .................................................................................... 144  
Printer Operation Keys .......................................................................................... 144  
On/OffLine Key ...................................................................................................... 144  
Reset Key ................................................................................................................ 144  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
ix  
Priority Key ............................................................................................................. 144  
Ink Management Key .............................................................................................. 145  
Turning off Bi-directional Printing ......................................................................... 145  
PC Printing  
Printer Emulation ........................................................................................... 147  
Using the Maintenance Utility Program for Printing from DOS ................. 147  
Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 147  
Data 1 ...................................................................................................................... 148  
Data 2 ...................................................................................................................... 148  
Installing the Brother MFC-7100 Series DOS Tools .............................................. 148  
Using the Brother MFC-7100 Series Printer Driver ....................................... 149  
The Paper Tab .......................................................................................................... 149  
Paper Size ............................................................................................................... 150  
User Defined Paper Size ......................................................................................... 150  
Paper Source ........................................................................................................... 151  
Feeder ............................................................................................................... 151  
Manual Feed ..................................................................................................... 151  
Orientation .............................................................................................................. 151  
Scaling .................................................................................................................... 151  
2 in 1 ................................................................................................................. 151  
Copies ..................................................................................................................... 152  
Collate............................................................................................................... 152  
Reverse Order ................................................................................................... 152  
The Quality/Color Tab ........................................................................................... 153  
Quality .................................................................................................................... 154  
Media ...................................................................................................................... 154  
Color/Mono............................................................................................................. 155  
Color ................................................................................................................. 155  
Mono................................................................................................................. 155  
Controlling the Color .............................................................................................. 155  
Document ................................................................................................................ 156  
Custom Setting........................................................................................................ 156  
Color Matching................................................................................................. 156  
Halftone Pattern ................................................................................................ 157  
Effect ................................................................................................................ 157  
The Control/Maintenance Tab ............................................................................. 158  
Monitor Calibration ................................................................................................ 159  
Bi-Directional Printing ........................................................................................... 159  
Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 159  
The Cleaning Tab .................................................................................................... 159  
Test Print ........................................................................................................... 159  
Cleaning............................................................................................................ 160  
The Printer Adjustment Tab .................................................................................... 160  
Vertical Alignment ............................................................................................ 160  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
x
Using the  
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 161  
Multi-Function  
18  
Link Pro  
Multi-Function Link Pro ......................................................................................... 162  
Visioneer PaperPortTM LE ....................................................................................... 163  
Sending a Fax from Your PC ................................................................................ 164  
Sending a Quick Fax ............................................................................................... 164  
Sending a Fax from the Main Menu ....................................................................... 165  
Sending a Fax from a Windows® Application ........................................................ 166  
Receiving Faxes into the PC .................................................................................. 166  
Checklist for the MFC ...................................................................................... 166  
Checklist for Your PC ....................................................................................... 167  
Viewing Received Faxes......................................................................................... 167  
Scanning a Document ............................................................................................. 168  
TWAIN COMPLIANT ..................................................................................... 168  
Accessing the Scanner ...................................................................................... 168  
Scanning a Document into the PC .................................................................... 169  
Settings in the Scanner Window ....................................................................... 169  
Resolution .................................................................................................... 169  
Color Type.................................................................................................... 170  
Size............................................................................................................. 170  
Custom ....................................................................................................... 171  
Adjust ......................................................................................................... 171  
Paper .......................................................................................................... 171  
Video Capture ............................................................................................ 171  
PreScanning an Image ...................................................................................... 171  
How to use PreScan to adjust an Image ....................................................... 172  
Brother Resource Manager ............................................................................... 173  
Video Capture from the PC................................................................................... 173  
Connecting Your Video Equipment ................................................................ 173  
Capturing An Image ......................................................................................... 174  
Software  
Using  
Internet  
NetCentric Internet Fax ......................................................................................... 177  
Before You Begin.................................................................................................... 178  
Compatible Operating Systems ........................................................................ 178  
Your Fax Service Account ................................................................................ 178  
Receiving Faxes ...................................................................................................... 178  
Creating An Inbound Account .......................................................................... 179  
Installing NetCentricTM FaxStorm ........................................................................... 179  
Overview of Utilities .............................................................................................. 180  
Contact Manager .............................................................................................. 180  
Cover Page Builder........................................................................................... 180  
Print Driver ....................................................................................................... 180  
Status Manager ................................................................................................. 180  
Viewfax (A Fax File Viewing Application) ...................................................... 181  
Faxing with  
TM  
19  
NetCentric  
FaxStorm  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
xi  
Accessing NetCentricTM FaxStorm.......................................................................... 181  
Sending Faxes ......................................................................................................... 181  
General Tab....................................................................................................... 182  
Addressing a Fax.......................................................................................... 182  
Adding Contacts One at a Time ................................................................... 182  
Selecting a Group (or a Contact from a Group) ........................................... 182  
Saving a New Contact from the Fax Send Window .................................... 183  
Specifying a Cover Page .............................................................................. 183  
About Sending a Fax as E-mail ................................................................... 184  
Attachments Tab ............................................................................................... 184  
Options/Sender Tab .......................................................................................... 185  
Sending a Fax from Other Windows® Applications................................................ 185  
If You Are Using Windows® 95 or 98 .......................................................... 185  
If You Are Using Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0 .......................... 186  
Setting Up Contacts in the Contact Manager.......................................................... 187  
To add a New Contact to the All Group ........................................................... 187  
To add a New Contact to Another Group ......................................................... 188  
Changing Contact Detail .................................................................................. 188  
Setting Up Multiple Addresses ......................................................................... 189  
Moving or Copying a Contact to Another Group ............................................. 190  
Creating a Group for Broadcasting................................................................... 190  
Managing You Faxes in the Status Manager........................................................... 191  
Accessing the Status Manager .......................................................................... 191  
Checking the Status of Sent Faxes (Outbox).................................................... 191  
Viewing Faxes You Received (Inbox) .............................................................. 192  
Managing Faxes from Your Account Page ............................................................. 192  
Accessing Your Account Page .......................................................................... 192  
Viewing Received Faxes in Your Account Page Inbox .................................... 193  
Checking Sent Faxes in Your Account Page Outbox ....................................... 193  
Customer Support ................................................................................................... 194  
Contact NetCentric Corporation at ................................................................... 194  
Using Automatic  
E-Mail Printing  
20  
Automatic E-mail Printing (For Windows® 95 and 98 Only) ....................... 195  
Main Features ......................................................................................................... 196  
Automatic E-Mail Printing is for Windows® 95 and 98 Only ................................ 196  
You Cannot Use a 16 bit TCP/IP Stack ............................................................ 196  
If You Are Using Korean Windows® 95 or 98 .................................................. 196  
Setting Up Automatic E-Mail Printing ................................................................... 197  
Setting Up the Server........................................................................................ 197  
Setting the Check Time .................................................................................... 198  
Using Automatic E-Mail Printing ........................................................................... 199  
Uninstalling Automatic E-Mail Printing from Windows® 95 or 98 ........................ 199  
If the Uninstall Program Displays a Error Message ......................................... 199  
To Access the Add/Remove Programs Properties Window .............................. 200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
xii  
Color Faxing with  
How 3D FaxSpeed Works....................................................................................... 201  
3D FaxSpeed  
®
21  
(For Windows 3.1,  
Special Coded Format (InfoImage) ........................................................................ 201  
Installing 3D FaxSpeed ................................................................................... 202  
Selecting Multi-Function Link Pro As Your Fax Application ................................ 203  
Creating 3D FaxSpeed Read Module Disks for Recipients .................................... 204  
Quick Start Procedures .......................................................................................... 205  
How to Send an InfoImage ..................................................................................... 205  
To Send an InfoImage with 3D FaxSpeed Standard Send: .............................. 205  
Using the 3D FaxSpeed Macro ............................................................................... 206  
To print the current document in your word processor directly to  
3.11, 95 and 98 Only)  
3D FaxSpeed: ................................................................................................ 206  
How to Read an InfoImage that Was Printed at Your MFC.................................... 206  
Follow these steps when a received InfoImage printed at the MFC: ............... 206  
How to Read an InfoImage that Was Received Into MFL Pro ............................... 207  
To read an InfoImage after viewing it in the MFL Pro Viewer/Editor: ............ 207  
If the Recipient Uses Another Fax Application ...................................................... 208  
3D FaxSpeed Read Module for Recipients ...................................................... 208  
For recipients of your InfoImage who are using another fax application: ... 208  
If the Recipient Uses a Fax Machine and Scanner ................................................. 209  
3D FaxSpeed Read Module for Recipients ...................................................... 209  
For recipients of your InfoImage who are using a fax machine  
and scanner: .............................................................................................. 209  
Optional  
Memory Board .......................................................................................................... 211  
Optional Memory for the Fax Operations................................................................ 211  
Installing the Optional Memory Board ................................................................... 212  
Accessories  
22  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
Important  
Information  
23  
Standard Telephone and FCC Notices................................................................ 215  
These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only. ..... 215  
Important—About the Interface Cable ............................................................. 217  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Declaration of Conformity (For USA Only) ........................................................ 217  
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (For Canada Only) ........................... 218  
International Energy Star Compliance Statement ........................................ 218  
Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................... 219  
Notice – Disclaimer of Warranties ................................................................... 221  
Compilation and Publication Notice ....................................................................... 221  
Trademarks ............................................................................................................. 222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
xiii  
Specifications  
Product Description ................................................................................................ 223  
Fax Specifications .................................................................................................... 223  
Printer Specifications.............................................................................................. 225  
Printing.................................................................................................................... 225  
Controller ................................................................................................................ 225  
Print Media ............................................................................................................. 226  
24  
Troubleshooting  
and Maintenance  
25  
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 227  
Fax-Back System .................................................................................................... 227  
Brother on the World Wide Web ............................................................................. 227  
Brother Bulletin Board............................................................................................ 227  
Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 228  
Document Jam ........................................................................................................ 229  
Printer Jam or Paper Jam ........................................................................................ 230  
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your MFC ........................................................ 234  
How to Improve Print Quality ............................................................................. 236  
Test Print ................................................................................................................. 236  
Cleaning the Print Head .......................................................................................... 236  
Aligning Ink Cartridges .......................................................................................... 237  
Turning off Bi-directional Printing ......................................................................... 238  
Packing and Shipping the MFC ........................................................................... 239  
Regular Maintenance.............................................................................................. 242  
Cleaning the Scanner .............................................................................................. 242  
Cleaning the MFC Printer Platen ............................................................................ 242  
Cleaning the Pick-up Roller.................................................................................... 243  
Replacing the Ink Cartridges .................................................................................. 243  
For Customer Service ............................................................................................. 246  
Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 247  
Index ........................................................................................................................... 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
C H A P T E R O N E  
Introduction  
1
UsingThis Manual  
Thank you for purchasing a Brother Multi-Function Center (MFC). This  
MFC has been designed to be simple to use, with LCD screen prompts to  
guide you through functions. However, you can use your MFC to its fullest  
potential by taking a few minutes to read this manual.  
Help/Broadcast  
Additionally, your MFC has a Help Key. Press  
basic operational steps and functions.  
to print a list of  
Finding Information  
All chapter headings and subheadings are listed in the Table of Contents.  
You will be able to find information about a specific feature or function by  
checking the Index in the back of this manual. Also, throughout this manual,  
you’ll see special symbols alerting you to important information, cross-  
references, and warnings. Illustrations of some screen displays also help  
you choose the correct key-presses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R O N E  
2
Test Sheet Procedures (For USA Only)  
See  
Setting  
Station ID  
pp. 36–37  
After programming your Station ID, please fill out the TEST SHEET  
included with your MFC and fax it to Brother’s Automated Fax Response  
System as your first transmission. This will verify that your MFC is  
properly installed.  
When this document is received, a confirmation sheet will be sent back to  
your MFC. In order to receive a response, be sure to set up your Station ID.  
USA  
1-908-685-9283 (fax)  
About Fax Machines  
If you’re a first-time fax machine user, fax operation might seem a little  
mysterious. Soon, you’ll recognize the unusual fax tones on your phone  
line, and be able to send and receive faxes easily.  
Fax Tones and Handshake  
When someone is sending a fax, the MFC sends fax calling tones, (CNG  
tones)—soft, intermittent beeps at 4-second intervals. You’ll hear them  
Start  
when you dial and press  
, and they continue for about 40 seconds after  
dialing. During that time, the sending machine must begin the “handshake”  
with the receiving machine. Each time you use automatic procedures to  
send a fax, you are sending CNG tones over the phone line. You’ll soon  
learn to listen for these soft beeps each time you answer a phone on your  
MFC line, so you can know if you are receiving a fax message.  
The receiving fax responds with fax receiving tones—loud, chirping  
sounds. A receiving fax chirps for about 40 seconds over the phone line,  
and the screen displays RECEIVING. If your MFC is set to the FAX mode,  
it will answer every call automatically with fax receiving tones. Even if the  
other party hangs up, your MFC continues to send the “chirps” for about  
40 seconds, and the screen continues to display RECEIVING.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N T R O D U C T I O N  
3
When your MFC answers in FAX/TEL mode, the MFC listens for CNG  
tones and then responds with receiving tones.  
The fax “handshake” is the time in which the sending machine’s CNG tones  
and the receiving machines “chirps” overlap. This must be for at least 2 to 4  
seconds, so the fax machines can understand how each is sending and  
receiving the fax. The handshake cannot begin until the call is answered,  
and the CNG tones only last for about 40 seconds after the number is dialed.  
Therefore, it’s important for the receiving machine to answer the call in as  
few rings as possible.  
When you have an external telephone answering device (TAD) on your  
MFC line, your TAD will determine the number of rings before the call is  
answered. Pay special attention to the directions in the Installation chapter for  
connecting a TAD to your MFC.  
ECM (Error Correction Mode)  
The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is a way for the MFC to check the  
integrity of a fax transmission while it is in progress. ECM transmissions  
are possible only between machines that both have the ECM feature. If they  
do, you may send and receive fax messages that are continuously checked  
for their integrity.  
Sufficient memory must be available in your MFC for this feature to work.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R O N E  
4
MFC 7150C Control Panel Overview  
25  
20  
28  
26  
19 18  
17  
27  
24 23  
22 21  
MFC 715OC  
Fine  
FAX  
TAD  
29  
30  
status  
status  
6
IN  
1
Photo  
S.Fine  
FAX PRINTER COPIER SCANNER PC FAX VIDEO CAPTURE  
FAX/TEL  
Function  
Set  
Clear  
Priority
ABC  
DEF  
Hook  
High  
01  
13  
02  
03  
15  
04  
16  
15  
16  
14  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
14  
GH I  
JKL  
MNO  
Volume  
Hold  
Low  
Stop  
05  
17  
06  
18  
07  
19  
08  
20  
5
TUV  
4
PQRS  
6
WXYZ  
Redial / Pause  
Speed Dial  
Start  
7
8
0
9
Shift  
10  
5
9 12  
8
6
11 13  
7
Hook  
1
Mode  
22  
Ink Management  
9
17  
18  
Stop  
Lets you dial telephone and  
fax numbers without lifting  
the handset.  
Use to select how the MFC  
will handle incoming calls.  
Cleans the ink print heads  
and/or resets the ink dot  
counter after replacing an  
ink cartridge.  
Stops a fax, cancels an  
operation, or exits from  
function mode.  
Resolution  
Sets the resolution when you  
send a fax.  
23  
24  
25  
2
3
Hold  
Start  
10  
Lets you put calls on hold.  
Priority  
Starts an operation, such as  
sending a fax.  
Press this key to receive all  
faxes in memory without  
first printing them.  
Redial / Pause  
Tel-index  
Lets you look up numbers  
stored in the dialing memory.  
Redials the last number  
called. Also inserts a pause  
in autodial numbers.  
11 Enlarge/Reduce  
Lets you reduce or enlarge  
copies depending on the  
ratio you select.  
Reset  
19  
20  
Ink Empty Indicator  
Blinks when ink cartridge is  
low and stays lit when ink is  
empty.  
Clears data from the printer  
memory, and then resets and  
restores to the factory default  
settings.  
Speed Dial  
4
5
Lets you dial stored phone  
numbers by pressing a  
two-digit number.  
Brightness  
12  
Lets you adjust the brightness  
of the whole image to be lighter  
or darker.  
Liquid Crystal Display  
LCD displays messages to help  
you set and operate your MFC.  
26  
27  
On/OffLine  
Dial Pad  
Use this key to turn the  
printer online (ready to  
receive PC data) and offline  
(not ready to receive PC  
data) alternately. When the  
printer is online, the LCD  
displays ONLINE.  
Dials phone and fax numbers,  
and can be used as a keyboard  
for entering information into the  
MFC. # key lets you switch the  
dialling type during a telephone  
call from “PULSE” to “TONE”.  
Paper Type  
13  
Use this key to temporarily  
change the paper type setting  
for Copy and Video Printing  
modes.  
(Left Arrow)  
(Right Arrow)  
Moves the LCD cursor  
through text and options.  
Copy Quality  
14  
6
7
Volume High / Low  
Adjusts speaker, ring and  
handset volume.  
Function  
Lets you access the function  
and programming mode.  
28  
29  
30  
Use this key to temporarily  
change the quality and type  
of original for Copy and  
Video Printing modes.  
Help/Broadcast  
21  
Press this key whenever you  
want a quick reference Help List  
printed. The Help List shows  
how to perform functions, how to  
register information, and how to  
get basic information. Also use  
this key whenever you want to  
broadcast faxes to many different  
locations, maximum of 130  
locations at once.  
Shift  
Set  
To access memory locations  
13 through 24 in the One  
Touch keys hold down the  
Shift key.  
15 Mono Copy  
Makes a black-and-white or  
single-color copy.  
Stores a function setting in the  
MFC.  
Clear  
16 Color Copy  
Makes a full-color copy.  
Deletes entered data or backs  
up one step in function  
procedure.  
8
One Touch Keys  
These 12 keys give you instant  
access to previously stored  
phone numbers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N T R O D U C T I O N  
5
MFC 7160C Control Panel Overview  
22  
33  
29 28  
27 26  
25 24  
32  
31  
30  
23  
716OC  
Voice  
Fax  
Fine  
FAX  
34  
35  
status  
status  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
Photo  
S.Fine  
FAX/TEL  
Function  
Set  
Clear  
Priority
1
2
ABC  
DEF  
Hold  
High  
01  
13  
02  
03  
15  
04  
16  
MIC  
1
2
JKL  
3
MNO  
14  
GH I  
Volume  
Shift  
Redial / Pause  
Speed Dial  
Low  
16  
15  
05  
17  
06  
18  
07  
19  
08  
20  
3
4
5
5
TUV  
4
PQRS  
6
WXYZ  
Stop  
Start  
7
8
0
9
Speaker Phone  
6
12 14  
10 13  
9
7
8
11  
1
2
Hold  
10  
11  
Reset  
19  
20  
21  
Mode  
27  
Stop  
Lets you put calls on hold.  
Use to select how the MFC  
will handle incoming calls.  
Stops a fax, cancels an  
Clears data from the printer  
operation, or exits from  
function mode.  
memory, and then resets and  
restores to the factory default  
settings.  
Microphone  
Picks up your voice when you  
speak to another party using  
speakerphone.  
Resolution  
Sets the resolution when you  
send a fax.  
28  
29  
30  
Start  
Ink Management  
Cleans the ink print heads  
and/or resets the ink dot  
counter after replacing an  
ink cartridge.  
Starts an operation, such as  
sending a fax.  
Redial / Pause  
3
4
5
Tel-index  
Lets you look up numbers  
stored in the dialing memory.  
Redials the last number  
called. Also inserts a pause  
in autodial numbers.  
12 Enlarge/Reduce  
Lets you reduce or enlarge  
copies depending on the  
ratio you select.  
Ink Empty Indicator  
Blinks when ink cartridge is  
low and stays lit when ink is  
empty.  
Priority  
Speed Dial  
Press this key to receive all  
faxes in memory without  
first printing them.  
Lets you dial stored phone  
numbers by pressing a  
two-digit number.  
Brightness  
13  
Lets you adjust the brightness  
of the whole image to be lighter  
or darker.  
Liquid Crystal Display  
LCD displays messages to help  
you set and operate your MFC.  
31  
32  
Play  
22  
23  
Speaker Phone  
Lets you listen to voice messages  
and outgoing messages.  
Lets you speak to the person  
at the other end and dial  
telephone and fax numbers  
without lifting the handset.  
Paper Type  
14  
Use this key to temporarily  
change the paper type setting  
for Copy and Video Printing  
modes.  
(Left Arrow)  
(Right Arrow)  
Moves the LCD cursor  
through text and options.  
Message Indicator Lights  
Notify you that you have  
voice or fax messages in the  
memory.  
6
7
Dial Pad  
Dials phone and fax numbers,  
and can be used as a keyboard  
for entering information into the  
MFC. # key lets you switch the  
dialling type during a telephone  
call from “PULSE” to “TONE”.  
Copy Quality  
15  
24 Erase  
Lets you delete voice  
Function  
Lets you access the function  
and programming mode.  
33  
34  
35  
Use this key to temporarily  
change the quality and type  
of original for Copy and  
Video Printing modes.  
messages, and/or fax messages  
from the memory  
Set  
25  
26  
Record  
Stores a function setting in the  
MFC.  
16 Color Copy  
Makes a full-color copy.  
Lets you record Outgoing  
Messages (OGM), memos  
and telephone calls.  
Volume High / Low  
Adjust speaker, ring and handset  
volume. The speaker volume is  
for message playback and  
Speaker Phone conversation.  
Clear  
17 Mono Copy  
Deletes entered data or backs  
up one step in function  
procedure.  
Makes a black-and-white or  
single-color copy.  
Help/Broadcast  
Press this key whenever you  
want a quick reference Help List  
printed. The Help List shows  
how to perform functions, how to  
register information, and how to  
get basic information. Also use  
this key whenever you want to  
broadcast faxes to many  
8
9
Shift  
18  
On/OffLine  
To access memory locations  
13 through 24 in the One  
Touch keys hold down the  
Shift key.  
Use this key to turn the printer  
online (ready to receive PC  
data) and offline (not ready to  
receive PC data) alternately.  
When the printer is online, the  
LCD displays ONLINE.  
One Touch Keys  
These 12 keys give you instant  
access to previously stored  
phone numbers.  
different locations, maximum  
of 174.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R O N E  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
C H A P T E R T W O  
MFC Setup and  
Connections  
2
Caution  
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
We recommend that this product be used with a surge protection device  
to protect the product against lightning storms.  
Never install a telephone jack in a wet location unless the jack is  
specifically designed for a wet location.  
Never touch telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless  
the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.  
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.  
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an  
electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from  
lightning.  
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket-outlet should be installed  
near the equipment and should be easily accessible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
8
Packing List  
Make sure you have the following items:  
Ink  
Cartridges  
Bi-directional  
Parallel Cable  
Telephone  
Line Cord  
Paper  
Wire  
Extension  
Handset  
Curled Cord  
Document  
Wire  
Extension  
Telephone  
Handset  
Document Tray  
Paper  
Tray  
Reference  
Guide for  
Improving  
Print Quality  
Brother Color  
Suite  
2 CD-ROMS  
Owner’s  
Manual  
Starter Coated  
Paper  
(Ink Jet Paper)  
Remote  
Control  
Access Card  
If an item is missing, call Brother Customer Service at 1-800-284-4329 (USA), 1-800-853-6660  
(from within Canada) or 1-514-685-6464 (from within Montreal). See Ordering Accessories  
and Supplies on page ii for the correct item numbers.  
Whenever you transport the MFC, use the packing materials that came with your MFC. If you do  
not pack the MFC correctly, you may void your warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
9
Choosing a Location  
Place your MFC on a flat, stable surface, such as a desk. Select a place that  
is free of vibration and shocks. Locate the MFC near a telephone jack and a  
standard, grounded power outlet. Choose a location where the temperature  
remains between 50°F and 95°F (10°–35°C).  
Avoid placing your MFC in a high-traffic area. Do not place near heaters,  
air conditioners, water, chemicals, or refrigerators. Do not expose the MFC  
to direct sunlight, excessive heat, moisture, or dust. Do not connect your  
MFC to electrical outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers.  
Disruption of power can wipe out information in the MFC’s memory. Do  
not connect your MFC to electrical outlets on the same circuit as large  
appliances or other equipment that might disrupt the power supply. Avoid  
interference sources, such as speakers or the base units of cordless phones.  
NO !  
NO ! NO !  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
10  
Assembly  
Connect the handset.  
1
Connect the longer end of the curled handset cord to the MFC and the  
shorter end to the handset.  
Connect the power cord.  
2
There is no ON/OFF switch. When you plug in the power cord, the  
power goes on and the screen alternately displays.  
SET CARTRIDGES  
OFFLINE  
PLS OPEN COVER  
OFFLINE  
Connect the telephone line cord.  
3
Connect one end of the telephone line cord to the jack on the MFC and  
the other end to a modular wall jack.  
Caution  
Operating the MFC before you install the ink cartridges will  
permanently damage the print head.  
Power  
Cord  
Telephone  
Line Cord  
Handset  
Curled Cord  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
11  
Caution  
The MFC must be grounded using a 3-prong plug.  
Since the MFC is grounded through the power outlet, you can protect  
yourself from potentially hazardous electrical conditions on the telephone  
network by keeping the power to your MFC on when you connect it to a  
telephone line. Similarly, you can protect yourself when you want to move  
your MFC, by disconnecting the telephone line first, and then the power  
cord.  
Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend  
that you use a quality surge protection device on the AC power line as  
well as on the telephone line, or unplug the lines during a lightning  
storm.  
Attach the paper wire extension to the multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
4
Multi-purpose  
Sheet Feeder  
Paper Wire  
Extension  
Attach the document wire extension.  
5
Document  
Wire  
Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
12  
Attach the paper tray to the paper output slot.  
6
Caution  
Please attach the Paper Tray to prevent paper jams and maintain print quality.  
Paper  
Output  
Slot  
Paper Tray  
Attach the document tray.  
7
Document Tray  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
13  
Pull out the plastic extension of the document tray.  
8
Plastic  
Extension  
Load paper in the multi-purpose sheet feeder (paper cassette).  
9
A Open the multi-purpose sheet feeder cover.  
Multi-purpose  
Sheet Feeder  
Cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
14  
B Fan the paper well. Load the paper. Make sure the print side is  
toward you and the paper level is stacked below the paper guide line.  
Paper  
Guide  
Line  
C Adjust the guides to fit the paper width.  
Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
15  
Installing the Ink Cartridges  
Check that you turned on the power (by plugging in the power cord).  
The screen alternately displays  
1
SET CARTRIDGES  
OFFLINE  
PLS OPEN COVER  
OFFLINE  
Open the top cover by pulling it toward you. After a few seconds, the print  
head will move left to its replacement position.  
2
Top Cover  
Open the ink cartridge covers by pressing the clips together as shown in the  
illustration.  
3
Clip  
Cartridge  
Cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
16  
Remove the yellow shipping cover by lifting it up and out.  
4
Caution  
The bottom of the yellow shipping cover is wet with ink that will  
cause stains, so wipe it clean before you place it down. Keep the  
yellow shipping cover in a safe place. You will need it in the future  
when you replace the print head.  
Yellow  
Shipping  
Cover  
We recommend that you install the ink cartridges from left to right in this  
order: Black, Yellow, Cyan, Magenta.  
Open the Black ink cartridge bag and remove the ink cartridge.  
5
Carefully remove the sealing tape from the side of the ink cartridge. Be  
sure to peel the tape in the direction away from you.  
6
Important  
To prevent spilling ink and staining your hands and clothing, peel the sealing  
tape gently and slowly. Do not touch the ink opening on the cartridge or the  
removed tape.  
opening  
Peel in the direction  
away from you!  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
17  
Each color has its own correct position. Gently insert the Black ink  
cartridge, matching the markings of the color indicators on the print head  
as a guide. Please be careful not to press down on the switch bar (see  
illustration) when inserting a cartridge.  
7
Switch  
Bar  
Repeat Steps 5–7 to install each color ink cartridge.  
Close the cartridge covers until they click into place.  
8
9
After installing all ink cartridges, close the top cover until it clicks into  
place. Your MFC now prepares for a “head cleaning” and goes online so it  
can set the ink dot counter. The MFC will ask you if you changed each  
color ink cartridge.  
10  
DID YOU CHANGE  
BLCK?1.YES 2.NO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
18  
1
Press  
on the dial pad for each color, as prompted (for initial setup only)  
11  
within 1 minute. The MFC will enter a cleaning cycle for approximately 6  
minutes. The screen alternately displays CLEANING BLACK and  
PLEASE WAIT. The ink dot counter will be set automatically for each  
color, so the MFC can warn you with an error message when ink is running  
low.  
Start  
Make sure paper is loaded in the cassette, then press  
minute.  
within 1  
When the MFC completes the cleaning cycle, the MFC starts printing the  
test sheet.  
Only during initial ink cartridge installation, the screen shows.  
12  
13  
PRINT OK?  
1.YES 2.NO  
Check the print quality of the test sheet. If it is not good, clean the print  
2
head again, by pressing  
OK for each color. Press  
. The screen will ask you if the print quality is  
for any color with a problem. You can choose  
Start  
2
several colors. After cleaning is finished, press  
.
The MFC starts printing Test Sheet No. 2.  
Adjust the Vertical Alignment by following the instructions printed on the  
Test Print page.  
WARNING  
If ink gets in your eyes, irrigate them with water immediately and consult a  
doctor if you are concerned.  
Caution  
DO NOT remove ink cartridges if you do not need to replace them. If  
you do so, it may reduce the ink quantity and the MFC will not know the  
quantity of ink left in the cartridge.  
DO NOT shake the ink cartridges. If you do so, the ink may spill when  
you take off the sealing tape. If ink stains your body or clothing, wash  
with soap or detergent immediately.  
If you install an ink cartridge in the wrong color position, you must clean  
the print head several times after correcting the cartridge installation and  
before you start printing because the colors were mixed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
19  
Once you open an ink cartridge, install it in the MFC and use it up within  
six months of installation. Use unopened ink cartridges by the expiration  
date written on the cartridge package.  
DO NOT refill the ink cartridges. Attempting to use refilled cartridges  
may cause damage to the print head and will void your warranty.  
If the INK EMPTY error message is on the screen display after you have  
installed the ink cartridges, check and make sure that the ink cartridges are  
installed correctly.  
Special Line Considerations  
Roll Over Phone Lines  
A roll over phone system is a group of two or more separate telephone lines  
that pass incoming calls to the next available line. The calls are usually  
passed down or “rolled over” to the next available phone line in a preset  
order.  
Your MFC can work in a roll over system as long as it is connected to the  
last number in the sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not put the  
MFC on any of the other numbers; when the other lines are busy and a  
second fax call is received, the fax call is transferred to a line that does not  
have a fax machine. Your MFC will work best on a dedicated line.  
Two-Line Phone System  
See  
Easy Receive  
p. 44  
A two-line phone system is nothing more than two separate phone numbers  
on the same wall outlet. The two phone numbers can be on separate jacks  
(RJ11) or combined into one jack (RJ14). Your MFC must be plugged into  
an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14 jacks may be equal in size and appearance and  
both may contain four wires (black, red, green, yellow). To test the type of  
jack, plug in a two-line phone and see if it can access both lines. If it can,  
you must separate the line for your MFC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
20  
Converting Telephone Wall Outlets  
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11 jack. The first two ways may  
require assistance from the telephone company. You can change the wall  
outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an RJ11  
wall outlet installed and slave or jump one of the phone numbers to it.  
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex adapter. You can plug a triplex  
adapter into an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two separate RJ11  
jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). Plug the MFC  
into Line 2 of the triplex adapter.  
Triplex Adapter  
RJ14  
RJ11  
RJ14  
Installing MFC, External Two-Line TAD, and Two-Line Telephone  
When you are installing an external two-line telephone answering device  
(TAD) and a two-line telephone, your MFC must be isolated on one line at  
both the wall jack and at the TAD. The most common connection is to put  
the MFC on Line 2. The two-line TAD must have two telephone jacks: one  
labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other labeled L2. You will need at least three  
telephone line cords, the one that came with your MFC and two for your  
external two-line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if you add a  
two-line telephone.  
Place the two-line TAD and the two-line telephone next to your MFC.  
1
2
Plug one end of the telephone line cord for your MFC into the L2 jack  
of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE jack on the back  
side of the MFC.  
Plug one end of the first telephone line cord for your TAD into the L1  
jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the L1 or L1/L2 jack  
of the two-line TAD.  
3
4
Plug one end of the second telephone line cord for your TAD into the  
L2 jack of the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into the EXT. jack on  
the back side of the MFC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
21  
Triplex Adapter  
Two Line Phone  
External Two Line TAD  
Fax Machine  
You can keep two-line telephones on other wall outlets as always. There are  
two ways to add a two-line telephone to the MFC’s wall outlet. You can plug  
the telephone line cord from the two-line telephone into the L1+L2 jack of the  
triplex adapter. Or, you can plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack of  
the two-line TAD.  
Multi-Line Connections (PBX)  
Most offices use a central telephone system. While it is often relatively  
simple to connect the machine to a key system or a PBX (Private Branch  
Exchange), we suggest that you contact the company that installed your  
telephone system and ask them to connect the MFC for you. It is advisable to  
have a separate line for the MFC. You can then leave the MFC in FAX mode  
to receive faxes any time of day or night.  
If the MFC is to be connected to a multi-line system, ask your installer to  
connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the unit from  
being activated each time a telephone call is received.  
As with all fax units, this machine must be connected to a two wire system. If  
your line has more than two wires, proper connection of the MFC cannot be  
made.  
If you are installing the MFC to work with a PBX:  
It is not guaranteed that the unit will operate correctly under all  
circumstances with a PBX. Any cases of difficulty should be reported  
first to the company that handles your PBX.  
1
2
3
If all incoming calls will be answered by a switchboard operator, it is  
recommended that the Answer Mode be set to MANUAL. All incoming  
calls should initially be regarded as telephone calls.  
The unit may be used with either pulse or tone dialing telephone service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
22  
Custom Features on a Single Line  
To learn how custom features may affect your faxing operations, please see  
the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter, p. 227.  
Connecting an External  
Telephone Answering Device (TAD)  
Sequence  
Although the MFC 7160C has a built-in answering system, you can choose  
to connect an additional answering system.  
When you have an external TAD on the same telephone line as the MFC,  
the TAD answers all calls. The MFC “listens” for fax calling (CNG) tones.  
If it hears them, the MFC takes over the call and receives the fax. If it  
doesn’t hear CNG tones, the MFC lets the TAD continue playing your  
outgoing message so your caller can leave you a voice message.  
The TAD must answer within four rings (the recommended setting is two  
rings). The MFC cannot hear CNG tones until the TAD has answered the  
call, and with four rings there are only 8–10 seconds of CNG tones left for  
the fax “handshake.” Make sure you carefully follow instructions in this  
manual for recording your outgoing message. Do not use a “toll-saver” ring  
setting on the TAD.  
Do not connect a TAD elsewhere on the same phone line—your MFC and  
TAD will both try to control the line.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M F C S E T U P A N D C O N N E C T I O N S  
23  
Connections  
The external TAD must be plugged into the back side of the MFC, into the  
jack labeled EXT. Your MFC cannot work properly if you plug the TAD into  
a wall jack.  
Plug the telephone line cord from the wall jack into the back side of the  
MFC, in the jack labeled LINE.  
1
Plug the telephone line cord from your external TAD into the back side  
of the MFC, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make sure this cord is connected  
to the TAD at the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not its telephone set  
jack.)  
2
Set your external TAD to four rings or less. (The MFC’s Ring Delay  
setting does not apply).  
3
Set the external TAD to answer calls.  
4
5
6
Record the outgoing message on your external TAD (see below).  
(For MFC 7160C Only) Set the MFC’s Message Storage to  
VOICE:EXT.  
Mode  
Press  
on the MFC until the FAX and FAX/TEL lights are on.  
7
Outgoing Message (OGM)  
Timing is important in recording this message.  
Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. (This  
allows your MFC time to listen for the fax CNG tones of automatic  
transmissions before they stop.)  
1
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
2
3
End your 20-second message by giving your Fax Receive Code for  
people sending manual faxes. For example:  
“After the beep, leave a message or send a fax by pressing 51 and  
press Start.”  
Connecting an External Telephone  
Your MFC is equipped with a handset that you can use as a regular phone.  
However, you can also connect a separate telephone (or telephone  
answering device) directly to your MFC.  
Connect the modular plug on the telephone’s line cord to the jack labeled  
EXT. on the back side of the MFC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W O  
24  
Whenever this phone (or TAD) is in use, the screen displays EXT. TEL IN  
USE, and, if the fax handset is lifted, an alarm sounds. To disconnect the  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
call on the external phone and switch to the fax, press  
or  
.
The external telephone cannot be used while a function is being performed  
on the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
C H A P T E R T H R E E  
Paper  
3
The quality of your document can be affected by the kind of paper you use  
in the MFC. You can use plain paper, coated paper, transparencies, glossy  
paper, organizer paper, and envelopes. We recommend testing various  
papers before purchasing large quantities. For best results, use Brother  
special coated paper, glossy paper, and transparencies. (See page ii for  
information about ordering Brother accessories).  
When you print on coated paper, transparencies, and glossy paper, be sure  
to select the correct media in the “Quality/Color” tab in the printer driver.  
When using coated paper or transparencies, avoid stacking by removing  
each page after copying or printing.  
About Brother Paper  
Brother paper is manufactured specifically for this MFC, to provide you  
optimum print quality.  
Quality Coated Paper for 360 dpi Color Ink Jet printing— normal  
mode (BP36CL for letter)  
High Quality Coated Paper for 720 dpi Color Ink Jet printing—  
super fine mode (BP72CL for letter)  
Color Ink Jet Transparencies— fine mode (BPTRL for letter)  
Color Ink Jet Glossy Paper— superfine mode (BPGLL for letter)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H R E E  
26  
Brother coated (ink jet) paper is coated only on one side. Make sure  
this whiter (coated) side is facing up toward you. Therefore, when  
loading paper in the paper cassette, make sure that the whiter side (the  
coated side) is facing up.  
The coated side of glossy paper is shiny. Do not touch the shiny side.  
Load glossy paper in the feeder with the shiny side facing up toward you.  
DO NOT touch the coated side of the paper or both sides of  
Transparencies, because it absorbs water and perspiration easily, and  
might cause decreased output quality.  
For optimum output quality, be sure to use paper appropriate for your  
resolution setting.  
Store paper in the original bag, and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat  
and away from moisture and direct sunlight and heat.  
Transparencies designed for laser printers/copiers may stain your next  
document. Use only recommended transparencies.  
Paper Specifications for Casette and Manual Feed Slot  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Cassette Capacity  
Cut Sheet  
Letter, Executive  
Legal  
200 Sheets of 20 lb(75 g/m2)  
100 Sheets of 20 lb(75 g/m2)  
Coated Paper  
Transparencies  
Glossy Paper  
Envelopes  
Letter  
100 Sheets  
Letter  
20  
20  
10  
Letter  
DL, COM-10, C5,  
B5, Monarch  
Organizer  
J(Manual Feed Slot Only), K, L 10  
Paper Capacity for Feeder  
Cut Sheet Paper Weight 16 to 32 lb (60 to 120 g/m2 )  
Sheet Feeder: Up to 0.87 inches (22mm) / Approximately 200 sheets of 20 lb  
(75 g/m2 )  
Output Stacker: Approximately 75 Sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2)  
Transparencies and glossy paper must be picked up from the paper tray one page at  
a time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P A P E R  
27  
Curled or damaged paper may cause paper jams and misfeeds. If the  
paper is curled, straighten it as much as possible by rolling it in the  
opposite direction of the curl.  
For optimum output quality, we recommend you use only genuine  
Brother paper.  
If paper will not load from the feeder, try the manual feed slot.  
For fax reception paper size, see page 45.  
Print Area  
The Print Area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The  
figures below show the unprintable areas on cut sheets and envelopes.  
Cut Sheet  
Envelopes  
3
4
3
4
1
1
2
2
unprintable area  
(inch)  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
1
2
3
4
Fax  
0.16  
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Printer  
Letter, Legal  
0.12  
0.43  
0.16  
Cut Sheet  
0.24  
0.34  
0.13  
0.13  
0.13  
Executive  
J, K, L  
Printer  
0.12  
0.12  
0.39  
0.43  
0.43  
0.79  
0.13  
0.13  
0.13  
Organizer  
Envelopes  
Printer  
Printer  
*Printer depends on the Printer driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H R E E  
28  
Do not use the following types of paper and envelopes:  
Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped paper and envelopes  
Extremely shiny or highly textured paper and envelopes  
Envelopes with clasps  
Envelopes of baggy construction  
Envelopes not sharply creased  
Embossed envelopes  
Paper and envelopes already printed with a laser printer  
Envelopes preprinted on the inside  
Paper and envelopes that cannot be arranged uniformly when stacked  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
C H A P T E R F O U R  
On-Screen  
Programming  
4
User-Friendly Programming  
See  
Using This  
Manual  
p. 1  
We have designed your Multi-Function Center with on-screen programming  
and a Help key. User-friendly programming helps you take full advantage of  
all the functions your MFC has to offer.  
Since your programming is done on the LCD, we created step-by-step on-  
screen prompts to help you program your MFC. All you need to do is follow  
the prompts as they guide you through the function menu selections and  
programming options and settings.  
Function Mode  
You can access the Function Mode by pressing  
Function  
. The screen displays  
1.FAX 2.PRINTER  
3.COPY 4.VIDEO  
1
2
Then press  
OR—press  
for Fax Functions—OR—press  
for Printer Functions  
3
4
for Copy Functions—OR—press  
for Video Functions.  
When you enter the Function Mode, your MFC displays a list of Level One  
Functions from which you can choose. These function options appear one  
Set  
after the other on the display. Select an option by pressing  
option appears on the LCD.  
when the  
You can “scroll” more quickly through options by pressing  
. When the  
Set  
screen displays your selection, press  
. Use  
to scroll backward if you  
passed your choice or to save key strokes. Both arrow keys show all  
options, in the opposite order.  
Stop  
If you want to exit the Function Mode, press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R  
30  
Alternating Displays  
When you see alternating displays, the LCD sometimes alternates between  
the currently selected option, and a help message giving brief instructions  
about how to proceed. The display you’ll probably see most often is shown  
below, showing you, when you place a document in the feeder, that you can  
dial a number and send a fax, or you can make a copy.  
FAX: NO. & START  
SCAN READY  
COPY: PRESS COPY  
SCAN READY  
Function Selection Table  
You can probably perform most of these programming settings without the  
Owner’s Manuals. To help you understand the function selections, options  
and settings that are found in the MFC programs, use the Function Selection  
Table below.  
1. Fax Functions  
1. INITIAL SETUP  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. TONE/PULSE  
2. DATE/TIME  
Selects dialing mode.  
TONE  
p. 35  
p. 36  
Enter date and time for LCD  
display and heading on  
transmissions.  
1999 1/1 00:00  
3. STATION ID  
Program name, fax number and  
telephone number to appear on  
each transmitted page.  
pp. 36–37  
4. BEEPER  
Adjust volume level of beeper. LOW  
p. 39  
p. 40  
5. DELAYED TIMER  
Sets the time of day that  
delayed faxes will be sent.  
00:00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O N - S C R E E N P R O G R A M M I N G  
31  
1. Fax Functions (continued)  
2. SETUP RECEIVE  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. RING DELAY  
Number of rings before MFC  
answers in FAX/TEL, FAX, or  
MC mode.  
RING DELAY: 04 p. 42  
TOLL SAVER: OFF p. 98  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
2. F/T RING TIME  
3. EASY RECEIVE  
4. REMOTE CODE  
Sets the time for “double ring” in 20  
FAX/TEL mode.  
p. 43  
Receive fax messages without  
pressing the Start key.  
ON  
p. 44  
Enter code to activate or deactivate ON ( 51, #51) pp. 47–48  
MFC from a remote location.  
5. REDUCTION  
6. PAPER  
Reduces size of image.  
AUTO  
p. 45  
Selects size of paper for fax receiving. LETTER  
p. 46  
7. POLLING RX  
Sets up your MFC to poll another  
fax machine.  
OFF  
pp. 48–50  
8. MF LINK  
Turn on if PC is connected to MFC ON  
for PC receiving of voice and fax  
messages.  
p. 138  
3. SETUP SEND  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. COVERPG SETUP Automatically sends a cover page OFF  
pp. 59–62  
pp. 62–63  
p. 63  
you program.  
2. COVERPAGE MSG Program customized message for  
fax cover page.  
3. CONTRAST  
Change lightness or darkness of a AUTO  
fax you are sending.  
4. RESOLUTION  
Allows you to change resolutions STANDARD  
page by page.  
pp. 68–69  
p. 64  
5. OVERSEAS MODE Adjusts for sometimes difficult  
OFF  
overseas transmissions.  
6. CALL RESERVE  
7. DELAYED FAX  
8. POLLED TX  
You can send a fax, then speak.  
Send documents later.  
OFF  
pp. 65–66  
p. 66  
Sets up your MFC with a document OFF  
to be retrieved by another fax machine.  
p. 69  
9. REAL TIME TX  
When memory is full, you can  
send faxes in real time.  
OFF  
p. 58  
4. REMAINING JOBS  
Function Description  
Factory Set More Info  
Check which jobs are in memory or  
cancel a delayed fax or polling job.  
pp. 51, 58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R  
32  
1. Fax Functions (continued)  
5. INTERRUPT  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
Send a fax now, even if you have the  
MFC set to send a fax later, or if  
you have it set for Polling.  
p. 70  
6. SET AUTO DIAL  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. ONE-TOUCH DIAL Dial numbers stored in memory  
pp. 71–72  
by pressing only one key.  
2. SPEED-DIAL  
Dial numbers stored in memory  
by pressing only three keys.  
p. 73  
3. SETUP GROUPS  
Set up a Group number for  
broadcasting.  
p. 75  
7. PRINT REPORTS  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. XMIT REPORT  
2. ACT. REPORT  
3. ALL DIAL  
OFF  
pp. 89–90  
Print lists and reports  
of activity.  
INTERVAL: OFF pp. 89–90  
pp. 89–90  
pp. 89–90  
pp. 89–90  
pp. 89–90  
4. TEL. INDEX  
(Details in Chapter 11)  
5. USER SETTINGS  
6. MEMORY STATUS  
8. REMOTE FAX OPT (For MFC 7150C Only)  
Function Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. FAX FWD/PAGING Set MFC to forward fax/message  
OR– to call your pager.  
OFF  
pp. 81–82  
2. FAX STORAGE  
Store incoming fax in memory  
for remote retrieval.  
OFF  
p. 83  
3. REMOTE ACCESS Set code for retrieving faxes.  
159  
p. 84  
p. 48  
4. PRINT FAX  
Print incoming faxes stored in  
the memory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O N - S C R E E N P R O G R A M M I N G  
33  
1. Fax Functions (continued)  
8. SETUP MSG CTR (For MFC 7160C Only)  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. MSG STORAGE  
Select if memory will store fax,  
voice or both.  
FAX: OFF  
VOICE: ON  
p. 93  
2. BACKUP PRINT  
3. OGM  
Prints copy of faxes received  
into memory.  
ON  
p. 96  
Select/Record outgoing message. MSG CTR OGM pp. 44, 93,  
94  
4. ICM MAX. TIME  
Select maximum length of incoming 30 (seconds)  
messages.  
p. 97  
5. ICM REC. MONITR Adjust speaker volume for voice ON  
p. 98  
messages as they come in.  
6. FAX FWD/PAGING Set fax to forward fax/message  
OR– to call your pager.  
OFF  
pp. 99–100  
p. 101  
7. REMOTE ACCESS  
Set code for retrieving messages. 159  
0. TEL SERVICE  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. DISTINCTIVE  
Use with phone company distinctive OFF  
ringing service to register the ring  
pattern with the MFC.  
pp. 51–52  
2. CALLER ID  
View or print a list of the last 30  
Caller IDs stored in memory.  
pp. 53–54  
2. Printer Functions  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. TEST PRINT  
2. VERTICAL ALIGN need to adjust the print  
Use these functions when you  
p. 236  
pp. 236, 237  
quality.  
3. BI-DIR PRINT  
ON  
pp. 145, 238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R  
34  
3. Copy Functions  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. PAPER TYPE  
Identify the type of paper in  
the cassette.  
PLAIN PAPER p. 112  
2. QUALITY  
Select Draft, Normal or High  
copy quality.  
HIGH  
p. 113  
p. 113  
p. 114  
3. ORIGINAL TYPE  
4. COLOR ADJUST  
Select Standard for any original  
that is not a photograph.  
STANDARD  
Adjust the amount of Red,  
Green, or Blue in copies.  
5. BRIGHTNESS  
6. CONTRAST  
7. ONE COLOR  
Adjust the brightness.  
Adjust the contrast.  
p. 114  
p. 114  
p. 115  
Select a single color to use,  
instead of Black, when you  
use Mono Copy key.  
OFF=Black  
4. Video Functions  
Function  
Description  
Factory Set More Info  
1. PAPER TYPE  
Identify the type of paper in  
the cassette.  
PLAIN PAPER p. 126  
2. QUALITY  
Select Normal or High print  
HIGH  
p. 126  
3. VIDEO TYPE  
Select Moving or Still video  
signal.  
MOVING  
pp. 126–127  
4. PRINT SIZE  
Select the size you want the  
captured frame to print.  
5.75"x4.25"  
p. 127  
p. 128  
p. 128  
5. COLOR ADJUST  
6. BRIGHTNESS  
Adjust the amount of Red, Green,  
or Blue in video printing.  
Adjust the brightness.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
C H A P T E R F I V E  
Initial  
Setup  
5
Getting Started  
Setting Dialing Mode (Tone/Pulse)  
Your MFC comes set to accommodate tone (multi-frequency) dialing service. If  
you have pulse (rotary) dialing service, you need to change the dialing  
mode.  
Function  
1
1
1
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to select TONE or  
1
PULSE.  
DIALING:TONE?  
DIALING:PULSE?  
Use  
or  
to select dialing mode.  
when the screen displays the dialing mode you want.  
to exit.  
2
3
4
Set  
Press  
Press  
Stop  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I V E  
36  
Setting Date and Time  
Your MFC displays the date and time, and prints it on every fax you send.  
In the event of a power failure, you may have to reset the date and time. All  
other settings remain unaffected.  
Function  
1
1
2
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to enter the year.  
1
ENTER YEAR:XX  
Set  
Enter the last two digits of the year and press  
you to enter the month.  
. The screen prompts  
2
ENTER MONTH:XX  
Enter two digits for the month (for example, enter 09 for September, or  
3
4
Set  
10 for October) and press  
. The screen prompts you to enter the day.  
ENTER DAY:XX  
Set  
Enter two digits for the day (for example, 06) and press  
prompts you to enter the time.  
. The screen  
ENTER TIME:XX:XX  
Enter the time in 24-hour format (for example, enter 15:25 for 3:25 PM)  
5
6
Set  
and press  
.
Stop  
Press  
. The screen now displays the date and time you set, and  
displays it whenever the MFC is standing by.  
Setting Station ID  
You can store your name, fax number, and telephone number to be printed  
on all fax pages that you send.  
See  
Composing  
Electronic  
Cover Page  
p. 59  
Function  
1
1
3
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to enter your fax  
1
number.  
FAX:  
Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits).  
2
3
See  
Entering Text  
pp. 37–38  
Set  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to enter your telephone number.  
TEL:  
Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits). If your telephone  
number and fax number are the same, enter the same number again.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N I T I A L S E T U P  
37  
Set  
Press  
name.  
. The screen prompts you to enter your name or your company  
5
NAME:  
Use the dial pad to enter your name (up to 20 characters).  
6
7
8
Set  
Press  
Press  
to confirm.  
Stop  
. The screen returns to the date and time.  
Entering Text  
When you are setting certain functions, such as the Station ID, you may  
need to enter text into the MFC. Most number keys have three or four letters  
printed above them. The keys for 0, #, and  
because they are used for special characters.  
don’t have printed letters  
By pressing the appropriate number key the correct number of times, you  
can access the character you want.  
Press Key  
one time  
two times  
three times four times  
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H
K
N
Q
U
X
L
O
M
P
R
V
Y
S
Z
T
W
Inserting spaces  
If you want to enter a blank space, press  
twice.  
Making corrections  
If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press  
to move  
Clear  
the cursor after the last correct letter. Then press  
; all letters above and  
to the right of the cursor are deleted. Re-enter the correct text and/or digits.  
You can also back up and type over incorrect letters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I V E  
38  
Repeating letters  
If you need to enter a character assigned to the same key as the previous  
character, press to move the cursor to the right.  
Special characters and symbols  
Press for (space) ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) + , - . /  
*
Press # for : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _  
Press Ø for É À È Ê Î Ç Ë Ö 0  
NOTICE  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it  
unlawful for any person to use a computer or electronic device to  
send any message via a telephone MFC unless such messages  
clearly contain, in a margin at the top or bottom of each  
transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date  
and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other  
entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone  
number of the sending machines or such business, other entity, or  
individual.  
In order to program this information into your MFC, you should  
complete the steps described on page 36 and 37.  
The telephone number you enter is used only for Call Back Message  
and Cover Page features.  
If you do not enter a fax number, no additional information can be  
entered.  
To enter a space, press  
characters.  
once between numbers and twice between  
If your Station ID has already been programmed, the screen prompts  
“1” to make a change, or “2” to exit without changing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N I T I A L S E T U P  
39  
Setting Beeper Volume  
You can set the beeper to LOW, HIGH or OFF. The default setting is LOW.  
When the beeper is set to LOW or HIGH, the MFC beeps every time you  
press a key or make an error, and at the end of fax sending or receiving.  
Function  
1
1
4
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
or  
to select your setting.  
Set  
When the screen displays the setting you want, press  
.
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Setting the Handset Volume  
You can adjust the handset volume any time you are talking on the  
telephone. There are two handset volume levels, LOW and HIGH. The  
default setting is LOW.  
Press  
or  
to adjust the volume level. The display shows the setting  
you are choosing.  
The new setting will remain until you change it again.  
Setting the Speaker Volume (For MFC 7160C Only)  
Hook  
You can adjust the speaker volume when your MFC is on  
OR—  
Speaker Phone  
. You can turn the speaker off or you can select a speaker  
volume level. The default setting is the lowest volume. (On the MFC  
Hook  
7150C, this will affect the volume of the one-way  
speaker.)  
Press or  
to adjust the volume level. The display shows the setting  
you are choosing. Each key press changes the volume to the next setting.  
The new setting will remain until you change it again.  
If you have a MFC 7160C, you can adjust the speaker volume while you are  
listening to your OGM (Outgoing Message) and ICMs (incoming messages).  
Function  
1
8
5
If you turn the Incoming Recording Monitor to OFF (  
,
,
,
)
on the MFC 7160C, the Speaker for screening calls will be disabled and you  
will not be able to hear callers leaving messages. The volume for other  
operations can still be controlled using  
and  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I V E  
40  
Setting the Ring Volume  
You can adjust the ring volume when your MFC is idle. You can turn the  
ring OFF or you can select a ring volume level.  
Press  
or  
to adjust the volume level. With each key press, the  
MFC rings so you can hear the current setting and the display shows the  
setting you are choosing. Each key press changes the volume to the next  
setting. The new setting will remain until you change it again.  
Memory Storage  
In the event of a power failure, all settings in the INITIAL SETUP, SETUP  
RECEIVE, SET AUTO DIAL, REMOTE FAX OPT (for MFC 7150C only),  
SETUP MSG CTR (for MFC 7160C only) plus the COVERPG SETUP and  
COVERPAGE MSG (from SETUP SEND) functions are stored  
permanently. You may have to reset the date and time.  
Delayed Timer  
See  
Delayed Fax  
p. 66  
You can set up the time of day that delayed faxes will be sent.  
Function  
1
1
5
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
Set  
. The screen displays  
SET TIME:12:34  
ENTER & SET  
Enter the time (in 24-hour format) that you want delayed faxes to be  
sent.  
3
SET TIME:17:00  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
4
5
Stop  
to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
C H A P T E R S I X  
Setup  
Receive  
6
Basic Receiving Operations  
Setting the Select Answer Mode  
There are different answer modes for your MFC. You may choose the mode  
that best suits your needs by pressing the Mode button repeatedly until you  
have changed the FAX and FAX/TEL lights to the setting you want to use.  
For more detailed information about a particular mode, please refer to the  
page number in the right column.  
The lighted indicators mean  
= not selected  
= is selected and lit.  
Mode  
Light  
How it works  
When to use it  
Page #  
You control the phone line and Use this mode when you are using a  
pp. 51–52  
FAX  
1. MANUAL  
(manual receive)  
must answer every call  
yourself.  
computer modem on the same line or  
if you receive very few fax  
messages.  
TAD  
(
)
FAX/TEL  
You can also use this mode with  
Distinctive Ringing.  
The MFC automatically  
answers every call as a fax.  
For dedicated fax lines. You cannot  
receive a voice call but you can call  
out.  
p. 2  
2. FAX  
(automatic receive)  
FAX  
TAD  
(
)
FAX/TEL  
MFC controls the line and  
automatically answers every call. machine on the same line, even if it is  
You cannot have an answering  
pp. 43, 47  
FAX  
TAD  
3. FAX/TEL*  
(Fax/Telephone)  
(
)
on a separate wall jack on the same  
line.  
If the call is a fax it will receive  
the fax. If the call is not a fax it  
FAX/TEL  
will ring (double ring) for you to You cannot use the telephone  
pick up the call.  
company’s Voice Mail in this mode.  
* In FAX/TEL mode you must set the Ring Delay and F/T Ring Time. If you have extension phones on the  
line, keep the Ring Delay to 4 rings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X  
42  
Mode  
Light  
How it works  
When to use it  
Page #  
The external TAD automatically Use this mode if you have an external pp. 22–23  
4. TAD  
FAX  
answers every call. Voice  
messages are stored on the  
external TAD. Fax messages are  
printed.  
answering machine on your phone  
line.  
(External Telephone  
Answering Device)  
TAD  
FAX/TEL  
(For MFC 7150C Only)  
The MFC automatically answers Use this mode to record both voice  
every call. The messages (99 and fax messages in the MFC’s  
minutes or up to 300 pages) are memory.  
stored in order on a first come  
first served basis.  
p. 91  
5. MSG CTR  
FAX  
(Message Center)  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
FAX/TEL  
To select or change your Answer Mode  
Mode  
Press  
until the FAX and FAX/TEL lights are lit for the answer mode  
you want.  
Setting Ring Delay  
The Ring Delay setting determines the number of times the MFC rings before  
it answers. If you have extension phones on the same line as the MFC, keep  
the Ring Delay default setting of 4.  
See  
Easy Receive  
p. 44  
and  
Function  
1
2
1
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
. If you have a MFC 7150C, go to Step 4.  
Operation from  
Extension  
Telephone  
pp. 47–48  
and  
For FAX/TEL  
Mode Only  
p. 47  
1
2
3
4
or  
to select Ring Delay.  
Set  
.
or  
to select how many times the line rings before the  
MFC answers (00–04). If you select 00, the line doesn’t ring at all.  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
5
6
Stop  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P R E C E I V E  
43  
Setting F/T Ring Time (For FAX/TEL Mode Only)  
If you set the answer mode to FAX/TEL, you’ll need to determine how long  
the MFC will send you its special double ring when you have a voice call.  
This ringing happens after the initial ringing from the phone company.  
Only the MFC rings, for 20, 30, 40 or 70 seconds; no other phones on the  
same line ring the special double ring. However, you can answer the call on  
any extension phone (in a separate wall jack) on the same line as the MFC.  
See  
Operation from  
Extension  
Function  
1
2
2
Press  
,
,
,
.
Telephone  
1
2
pp. 47–48  
Press  
or  
to select how long the MFC will ring to alert you that  
you have a voice call.  
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
3
RING TIME:20 SEC  
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
4
Now, when a call comes in and the MFC is set to FAX/TEL mode, all  
phones on this line will ring the number of times you selected in Ring  
Delay.  
You can let the MFC pick up and detect if it’s a fax or voice call. If it’s a fax  
call, the MFC prints the fax. If it’s a voice call, the MFC signals you with a  
double ring for the length of time you selected in F/T Ring Time.  
Even if the caller hangs up during the double ringing, the MFC continues  
for the set time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X  
44  
Record F/T OGM (FAX/TEL Outgoing Message)  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
This is the announcement played by your MFC (not an external TAD) when  
someone calls and your MFC is set to FAX/TEL mode. Although callers  
hear your announcement, they cannot leave a message. To erase the  
announcement, follow the directions on page 94, “Erasing Outgoing  
Message.”  
Function  
1
8
3
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to choose F/T OGM  
1
or MSG CTR OGM.  
Press  
Press  
Press  
or  
to select F/T OGM.  
2
3
4
5
6
Set  
.
Record  
, then pick up the handset to record a message.  
Replace the handset. Your OGM is played.  
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Easy Receive  
Start  
See  
Operation from  
Extension  
Telephone  
pp. 47–48  
and  
For FAX/TEL  
Mode Only  
p. 47  
When you use this feature, you don’t have to press  
when you answer a  
fax call and hear calling beeps. Just hold the handset and wait a few  
seconds. When you see “RECEIVING” on the fax screen or when you hear  
“chirps” through the handset of an extension phone connected to another  
wall jack, just replace the handset, and your MFC does the rest. Selecting  
ON allows the MFC to receive fax calls automatically, even if you lift the  
handset of an extension or external phone. Selecting SEMI lets the MFC  
receive the call only if you’ve answered it at the MFC. Selecting OFF  
Start  
means you’ll have to activate the MFC yourself, by pressing  
or by  
1
5
pressing  
if you are not at your MFC.  
If you’ve set the feature to ON, but your MFC doesn’t automatically  
connect a fax call when you lift an external or extension phone handset,  
1
5
press the Fax Receive code  
. At the MFC, lift the handset and  
Start  
press  
.
Function  
1
2
3
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
Use  
or  
to select ON, SEMI or OFF.  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
Stop  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P R E C E I V E  
45  
Printing a Reduced Incoming Document  
You can always reduce the size of an incoming fax to a fixed percentage,  
regardless of the size of the paper (up to legal) in your MFC. If you choose  
AUTO, your MFC chooses the level of reduction for you.  
Function  
1
2
5
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
5.REDUCTION  
Use  
or  
to select the reduction ratio you want—AUTO, 100%,  
2
88%, 83% or 70%. Choose 100% if you don't want a reduction.  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
3
4
Stop  
Recommended Reductions  
If your paper is letter size (8.5" x 11"), and the incoming fax is  
letter size, select 88%  
A4, select 83%  
legal size, select 70%  
If your paper is legal size (8.5" x 14"), and the incoming fax is  
letter size, select 100%  
A4, select 100%  
legal size, select 88%  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X  
46  
Setting Paper Size  
You can use two sizes of paper for printing your faxes — letter, legal,  
although the displays shows three selections. When you change the kind of  
paper you have loaded in the MFC, you will need to change the setting for  
paper size, so your MFC will know how to fit the incoming fax on the page.  
You can also select the level of page reduction to fit on the paper in your  
MFC.  
Function  
1
2
6
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
6.PAPER  
Use  
or  
to select LETTER or LEGAL.  
2
3
Set  
Press  
The screen displays  
when the screen displays your selection.  
CHANGE REDUCTION  
1.YES 2.NO  
2
1
Press  
if you need to change the reduction setting—OR—Press  
to  
go to Step 6.  
Use  
or  
to select AUTO, 100%, 88%, 83% or 70%.  
4
5
6
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
Stop  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P R E C E I V E  
47  
Advanced Receiving Operations  
Operation from Extension Telephone  
See Easy  
Receive  
p. 44  
If you answer a fax call on an extension phone or on an external phone in the  
EXT. jack, you can make your MFC take over by using the Fax Receive  
5
1
Code. When you press the Fax Receive Code  
receive a fax.  
, the MFC starts to  
See  
F/T Ring Time  
p. 43  
If the MFC answers a voice call and double-rings for you to take over, use  
5
1
the Telephone Answer Code  
phone.  
to take the call at an extension  
If you answer a call, and no one is on the line, assume you’re receiving a fax.  
Start  
At the MFC phone, press  
, then hang up. At an extension phone, press  
5
1
, wait for fax receiving tones (chirps), then hang up. At an external  
5
1
phone, press  
and wait for the phone to be disconnected (the screen  
displays RECEIVING) before you hang up. (Your caller will have to press  
Start  
to send the fax.)  
For FAX/TEL Mode Only  
When the MFC is in FAX/TEL mode, it will use the F/T Ring Time (double  
ringing) to alert you to a voice call. If you’re at the MFC, you can lift the  
handset to answer.  
If you’re at an extension phone, you’ll need to lift the handset during the  
5
1
F/T Ring Time and press  
between the double rings. If no one is  
on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the  
5
1
MFC by pressing  
.
Changing Remote Codes  
Remote Codes might not work with some telephone systems. The preset Fax  
5
1
5
1
Receive Code is  
. The preset Telephone Answer Code is  
.
If you are always disconnected when accessing your external TAD  
5
1
remotely, try changing the Fax Receive Code from  
to  
.
5
1
9
9
9
and the Telephone Answer Code from  
to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X  
48  
To change Remote Codes  
Function  
1
2
4
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
to select ON (or OFF).  
REMOTE ACT.:ON?  
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays the setting you want.  
3
4
Set  
If you want to, enter a new Fax Receive Code, then press  
.
*
FAX RECEIVE: 51  
Set  
If you want to, enter a new Telephone Answer Code, then press  
.
5
6
TEL ANSWER:#51  
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Printing a Fax in Memory (For MFC 7150C Only)  
See  
Setting Fax  
Storage  
If you have Fax Storage ON for remote retrieval, you can still print a fax in  
the memory when you are at your MFC.  
Function  
1
8
4
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
p. 83  
1
2
3
Start  
.
Stop  
After printing is finished, press  
to exit.  
Polling  
Polling is the process of retrieving faxes from another fax machine. You  
can use your MFC to “poll” other machines, or you can have someone poll  
your MFC.  
All parties involved in polling need to set up their fax machines to  
accommodate polling. When someone polls your MFC to receive a fax,  
they pay for the call; if you poll someone’s fax machine to receive a fax,  
you pay for the call.  
Some fax machines do not respond to the polling function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P R E C E I V E  
49  
Setting Up Polling Receive  
Polling Receive is when you call another fax machine to receive a fax from it.  
Function  
1
2
7
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
The screen displays  
POLLING RX:OFF?  
SELECT <- -> & SET  
Press  
Press  
or  
to choose ON.  
2
3
Set  
. The screen displays  
ENTER FAX NO.  
ONLINE  
PRESS START KEY  
ONLINE  
Enter the fax number you are polling.  
4
5
Start  
Press  
. The screen displays DIALING.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X  
50  
Setting Up Sequential Polling Receive  
Your MFC can request documents from several fax units in a single  
operation. Afterward, a Sequential Polling Report will be printed.  
Function  
1
2
7
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
The screen displays:  
POLLING RX:OFF?  
SELECT <- -> & SET  
Press  
Press  
or  
to select Polling ON.  
2
3
POLLING RX:ON?  
Set  
. The screen prompts you to enter the fax numbers to be  
polled.  
ENTER FAX NO.  
ONLINE  
PRESS START KEY  
ONLINE  
Specify the destination fax machines you wish to poll, using  
One Touch, Speed Dial, a Group or the dial pad. You must press  
4
5
Help/Broadcast  
between each location.  
Start  
Press  
.
ACCEPTED  
ONLINE  
Your MFC will poll each number or group member in turn for a  
document.  
DIALING  
ONLINE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P R E C E I V E  
51  
Canceling a Scheduled Job  
See  
Checking  
Job Status  
p. 58  
You can cancel tasks you’ve scheduled, such as Delayed Fax or Polling  
Transmit.  
Function  
1
4
Press  
,
,
. Any waiting jobs appear on the display. If no job  
1
is waiting, the screen displays “NO JOB WAITING.”  
4.REMAINING JOBS  
If you have more than two jobs waiting, use  
or  
to select the job  
2
Set  
you want to cancel. Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
OR—  
If you have only one job waiting, go to step 3.  
1
2
Press  
to cancel—OR—Press  
to exit without canceling.  
3
4
To cancel another job, return to Step 2.  
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Distinctive Ringing  
This MFC feature lets you use the Distinctive Ringing subscriber service  
offered by some telephone companies, which allows you to have several  
telephone numbers on one phone line. Each phone number has its own  
Distinctive Ringing pattern, so you’ll know which phone number is ringing.  
This is one way you can have a separate phone number for your MFC.  
Your MFC has a Distinctive Ringing function, allowing you to dedicate one  
phone number just for receiving faxes. You’ll need to follow the directions  
below to “register” the new Distinctive Ringing pattern, that was assigned  
by the Telephone Company, so your MFC can recognize its incoming calls.  
(Call your Telephone Company if you don’t know your ring pattern.)  
You can change or cancel the Distinctive Ringing pattern at any time. You  
can switch it off temporarily, then turn it back on. When you get a new fax  
number, make sure you reset this function.  
You can register only one Distinctive Ringing pattern with the MFC. Some  
ringing patterns cannot be registered.  
The MFC will answer only calls to its registered number.  
To have your TAD answer only the main number, the MFC must be in  
Manual Mode.  
In FAX/TEL or FAX mode, the MFC will answer all numbers on the  
phone line.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X  
52  
Registering the Distinctive Ringing Pattern  
If you are not sure which ring pattern you have, call your Telephone  
Company. Then assign that pattern in the steps below.  
Disconnect the MFC from any TAD or telephone company voice mail.  
Set the MFC to MANUAL mode.  
1
2
3
Function  
1
0
1
Press  
this feature.  
,
,
,
. The screen displays the current setting of  
Press  
or  
to select the SET mode. The screen displays  
4
DISTINCTIVE:OFF?  
DISTINCTIVE:SET?  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays DISTINCTIVE:SET ?.  
5
6
or  
to select the prestored ring pattern you want to assign.  
(You will hear each pattern as you scroll through the four patterns.) Be  
sure to choose the pattern assigned by the Telephone Company.  
Ring  
Pattern  
Rings  
1
long - long  
2
3
4
short - long - short  
short - short - long  
very long (normal pattern)  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
7
8
Stop  
to exit.  
Once you’ve registered the Distinctive Ringing pattern in your MFC, you  
can turn this feature ON or OFF. To change the setting, follow steps 1 to 4  
above, selecting ON or OFF.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P R E C E I V E  
53  
Caller ID  
The Caller ID feature of this MFC lets you use the Caller ID subscriber  
service offered by many local phone companies. This service provides you,  
by means of the screen display, the name or telephone number of your  
caller as the line rings.  
After a few rings, the screen displays the telephone number of your caller  
(or name, if available). Once you pick up the handset, the Caller ID  
information disappears from the screen, but the call information remains  
stored in the Caller ID memory.  
You will see the first 16 characters of the number or name.  
OUT-OF-AREA display means call originates outside your Caller ID  
service area.  
PRIVATE CALL display means the caller has intentionally blocked  
transmission of information.  
CALL PICKUP display remains on screen when no Caller ID  
information was transmitted.  
See  
Printing Caller  
ID List,  
If both the name and number are received, the screen displays only the  
name. You can print a list of Caller ID information received by your MFC.  
p. 54  
Caller ID service varies with different carriers. Call your local phone  
company to determine what kind of service is available in your area.  
Viewing Caller ID List  
Caller ID memory stores information for up to thirty calls; when the thirty-  
first call comes in, information about the first call is erased. You can scroll  
through Caller ID information to review those calls made to your MFC.  
Function  
0
2
1
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
or  
to select DISPLAY #?.  
Set  
. The screen displays the ID of the most recent call. If the  
name was not received, it will not be displayed.  
Press or to scroll through the Caller ID memory and select the  
Caller ID you want to view.  
4
5
6
Set  
Press  
to see detailed information of the selected ID. The screen  
shows the caller’s name and number and the date and time of the call.  
Stop  
Press  
exit.  
or  
to return to the Caller ID listing—OR—Press  
to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X  
54  
Clearing a Caller ID Stored in Memory  
For effective use of the memory, it is recommended that you frequently  
erase the caller IDs stored in memory. When the display shows the number  
Clear  
or name, press  
to delete the selected ID.  
Printing Caller ID List  
Function  
1
0
2
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
or  
to select PRINT REPORT?.  
Set  
.
Start  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
Setup  
Send  
7
BeforeYou Begin  
Documents must be between 2.75 and 8.5 inches wide, and 5 and 14  
inches long.  
Make sure you insert documents face down, top edge first.  
Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your document.  
Paper Guides  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
56  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)  
The automatic document feeder (ADF) can hold up to 20 pages, feeding  
each one individually through the MFC. Use standard (20 lb/75g/m2) paper  
when using the ADF.  
Resolution  
See  
Multiple  
Resolution  
Transmission  
pp. 68–69  
Resolution  
Press  
(before you send the fax) to select the resolution for the  
document you’re sending.  
Fine  
Photo  
S.Fine  
Resolution  
Standard—Suitable for most typed documents. (Fine and S. Fine lights  
are off.)  
Fine—Good for small print; transmits slower than standard resolution.  
(Only the Fine light is on.)  
Super Fine—Good for small print or artwork; transmits slower than  
fine resolution. (Only the S. Fine light is on.)  
Photo—Use when document has varying shades of gray; slowest  
transmission time. (Both Fine and S. Fine lights are on.)  
DO NOT use curled, wrinkled, folded, or ripped paper, or paper with  
staples, paper clips, paste or tape attached. DO NOT use cardboard,  
newspaper, or fabric.  
Make sure documents written with ink are completely dry.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P S E N D  
57  
Manual Transmission  
Manual transmission lets you hear the dial tone, ringing and fax receiving  
tones before sending the fax.  
Insert the document face down in the feeder.  
Pick up the handset and listen for a dial tone  
1
2
See  
One-Touch  
Dialing  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
OR—press  
or  
and listen for a dial tone.  
Enter the fax number you want to call (you can enter the digits using  
the dial pad, or you can enter a One Touch or Speed Dial number or you  
can call from the Tel-index).  
3
p. 78  
Start  
When you hear the fax tone, press  
If you’re using the handset, hang up.  
.
4
5
Automatic Transmission  
This is the easiest way to send a fax. IMPORTANT: Do not pick up the  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
handset, or press  
or  
.
Insert the document face down in the feeder.  
1
2
See  
Speed Dialing  
p. 78  
Enter the fax number using One Touch, Speed Dial, Tel-index or the  
dial pad.  
Start  
Press  
.
3
Manual and Automatic Fax Redial  
Redial/Pause  
If you’re sending a fax manually and the line is busy, press  
to  
retry the number.  
If you’re sending a fax automatically and the line is busy, the MFC will  
automatically redial up to three times at 5 minute intervals.  
Dual Access  
If the document feeder is empty, you can place a document in the feeder, set  
temporary settings, dial a number, and begin scanning the fax into memory, even  
when the MFC is receiving a fax, sending a fax, or printing a fax from memory.  
The screen displays the new job number and how much memory is available.  
If you get a MEMORY FULL message while scanning the first page of a fax  
Stop  
press  
to cancel the scan. If you get a MEMORY FULL message while  
Start  
scanning in a subsequent page, you’ll have the option to press  
to  
Stop  
transmit the pages scanned so far, or to press  
to cancel the operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
58  
Real Time Transmission  
When memory is full, the MFC cannot continue scanning documents into  
memory before sending. However, you can turn on REALTIME TX.  
Insert the document in the feeder.  
1
2
3
Function  
1
3
9
Press  
,
,
,
.
The screen displays  
9. REAL TIME TX  
Press  
Press  
Press  
or  
to choose NEXT FAX ONLY or ON.  
4
5
6
7
8
Set  
.
Stop  
to exit.  
Start  
Enter the fax number and press  
.
As soon as the phone line is free, the MFC starts dialing and sending the fax.  
Checking Job Status  
See  
Canceling Jobs  
in Memory  
below  
You can check which jobs are in memory waiting to be sent. Press  
Function  
1
4
,
,
to check it. While the MFC is sending or receiving a fax,  
Stop  
press  
. The screen displays job numbers. Press or to see them.  
Canceling Jobs in Memory  
See  
Checking Job  
Status  
You can cancel tasks you’ve scheduled, such as Polling Transmit, as well as  
all faxes waiting in Memory to be sent.  
Function  
1
4
Press  
,
,
. Any waiting jobs appear on the display. If  
1
above  
nothing is waiting, the screen displays NO JOB WAITING.  
4.REMAINING JOBS  
If you have more than two jobs waiting, use  
or  
to select the job  
2
Set  
you want to cancel. Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
OR—  
If you have only one job waiting, go to step 3.  
1
2
Press  
Press  
to cancel—OR—Press  
to exit without canceling.  
3
4
Stop  
to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P S E N D  
59  
Basic Sending Operations  
See  
One Touch  
Composing Electronic Cover Page  
Dialing p. 78  
and  
Speed Dialing  
p. 78  
The cover page is generated at the receiving party’s machine. Your cover  
page includes the name stored in the One Touch or Speed Dial memory. If  
you’re dialing manually, the name is left blank.  
The cover page indicates the fax is from your Station ID, and the number of  
pages you’re sending. If you have Coverpage Setup set to ON  
See  
Setting Station  
ID  
Function  
1
1
3
(
,
,
,
), the number of pages remains blank.  
pp. 36–37  
Most of the Setup Send functions are temporary settings that allow you to  
make adjustments for each document you send. However, so you can set up  
your cover page and cover page comments, the Cover Page Setup and Cover  
Page Message functions will change the default settings.  
You can select a comment to include on your cover page.  
1.COMMENT OFF  
2.PLEASE CALL  
3.URGENT  
4.CONFIDENTIAL  
Instead of using one of the comments above, you can enter up to two customized  
messages, each 27 characters long. Use the chart on page 37 to help enter characters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
60  
Cover Page for Next Fax Only  
Make sure the Station ID is set up (pp. 36–37). This feature does not work  
without the Station ID.  
You can set the fax to send a cover page with a particular document. This  
cover page will include the number of pages in your document.  
Insert the document in the feeder.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Function  
1
3
1
Press  
,
,
,
.
Set  
When the screen displays NEXT FAX ONLY?, press  
.
Press  
Press  
Press  
or  
to select ON.  
Set  
.
or  
to view the comment selections.  
1.COMMENT OFF  
2.PLEASE CALL  
3.URGENT  
4.CONFIDENTIAL  
5.(USER DEFINED)  
6.(USER DEFINED)  
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
7
8
Enter two digits to indicate the number of pages you are sending. (Enter  
0
0
to leave the number of pages blank.) If you make a mistake,  
to back up and reenter the number of pages.  
press  
Press  
Set  
. The screen displays:  
9
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P S E N D  
61  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns to  
10  
2
the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
if you are finished choosing  
settings, and go to step 11.  
Enter the fax number you’re calling.  
11  
12  
Start  
Press  
.
Always Send Cover Page  
Make sure Station ID is set up (pp. 36–37). This feature does not work  
without the Station ID.  
You can set the MFC to send a cover page whenever you send a fax. The  
number of pages in your fax is not included when you use this setting.  
Function  
1
1
3
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
to select.  
COVERPAGE:OFF?  
COVERPAGE:ON?  
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays COVERPAGE: ON?. (If you select  
3
4
ON, a coverpage is always sent when you send a fax.)  
If you selected ON, you must select a comment. Use  
possible selections. (You can select your custom comment.)  
or  
to view  
1.COMMENT OFF  
2.PLEASE CALL  
3.URGENT  
4.CONFIDENTIAL  
5.(USER DEFINED)  
6.(USER DEFINED)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
62  
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection. The screen displays:  
5
6
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns to  
2
the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
choosing settings.  
to exit if you are finished  
Using a Printed Cover Page  
If you prefer using a printed cover page that you can write on, you can print  
the sample page and attach it to your fax.  
Function  
1
3
1
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
or  
to select PRINT SAMPLE?.  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
Start  
. Your MFC prints a copy of your cover page.  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
COVER PAGE  
- - -  
TO:  
FROM:  
FAX:  
TEL:  
PAGE[S] TO FOLLOW  
COMMENT:  
Cover Page Message  
You can set up two custom comments.  
Composing Your Own Comments  
Function  
3
2
1
Press  
Use  
,
,
,
. The screen displays: COVERPAGE MSG.  
1
2
or  
to choose position 5 or 6 for your customized comment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P S E N D  
63  
Set  
Press  
.
3
4
5
See  
Entering Text  
p. 37  
Use the dial pad to enter your customized comment.  
Set  
Press  
. The screen displays:  
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns to  
6
2
the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
to exit.  
Contrast  
If your document is very light or very dark, you might want to set the  
contrast accordingly. Use S.LIGHT to send a very light document. Use  
S.DARK to send a very dark document.  
Insert the document, face down, in the feeder.  
1
2
3
4
Function  
1
3
3
Press  
Use  
,
,
,
.
or  
to select AUTO, S.LIGHT or S.DARK.  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
displays:  
. The screen  
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns to  
5
6
2
the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
settings, and go to step 6.  
if you are finished choosing  
Start  
Enter a fax number and press  
to send a fax.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
64  
Advanced Sending Operations  
Overseas Mode  
After you send a fax using this feature, the feature turns itself off.  
Insert document.  
1
2
Function  
1
3
5
Press  
,
,
,
.
5.OVERSEAS MODE  
Press  
Press  
or  
to select ON (or OFF).  
3
4
Set  
when the screen displays your selection. The screen displays  
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns  
5
2
to the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
if you are finished  
choosing settings and go to step 6.  
Enter the fax number you’re calling.  
6
7
Start  
Press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P S E N D  
65  
Call Reservation  
You can send a fax and let the other party know that you want to speak to  
him after the fax transmission is complete. The other fax machine will ring  
as if it were receiving a telephone call; if the other party picks up the  
handset, your MFC will ring. Lift the handset to have a conversation.  
If you set Call Reservation and Call Back message to ON, your MFC leaves  
a message if the other party does not answer.  
Insert the document in the feeder.  
1
2
Function  
1
3
6
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen displays the current setting for  
Call Reservation.  
CALL RESERVE:OFF  
CALL RESERVE:ON  
Press  
or  
to select ON (or OFF).  
3
4
Set  
If you set Call Reservation to ON, press  
your selection. The screen displays the current setting for Call Back  
Message.  
when the screen displays  
CALL BACK:OFF?  
CALL BACK:ON?  
Press  
Press  
or  
to select ON (or OFF).  
5
6
Set  
when the screen displays your selection. The screen displays  
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns to  
7
8
2
the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
settings, and go to step 8. The screen prompts you to enter the fax  
number you want to call.  
if you are finished choosing  
Enter the fax number.  
Start  
Press  
.
9
10  
If you’ve set Call Reservation to ON, pick up your handset if the MFC  
rings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
66  
You cannot use auto redial with Call Reservation. You cannot use Call  
Reservation with Delayed Transmission or with Polling. You must register  
your Station ID to set Call Back Message to ON.  
Print Sample Call Back Message  
Function  
1
3
6
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
or  
to select PRINT SAMPLE?.  
Set  
.
Start  
.
Delayed FAX  
See  
Delayed Timer  
p. 40  
After you have preset the time of day for delayed faxes (in Delayed Timer),  
you can use this function up to 50 times each day to set up delayed faxes.  
Insert the document in the feeder.  
1
2
3
Function  
1
3
7
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
Set  
. The screen displays  
1.DOC 2.MEMORY  
1
2
Press  
Press  
to leave the originals waiting in the document feeder—OR—  
to scan the document into memory.  
4
5
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns to  
2
the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
if you are finished choosing  
settings and go to Step 6. The screen prompts you to enter the fax  
number.  
ENTER FAX NO.  
ONLINE  
PRESS START KEY  
ONLINE  
Enter the fax number.  
6
7
Start  
Press  
. The MFC will wait until the time you have entered to send  
the fax.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P S E N D  
67  
Broadcasting  
Broadcasting is automatically sending the same fax message to multiple fax  
Help/Broadcast  
numbers. Using the  
key, you can include Groups, One Touch  
locations, Speed Dial locations and up to 50 manually dialed numbers. If  
you did not use up any locations for Groups, access codes or credit card  
numbers, you can “broadcast” faxes automatically to up to 130 different  
locations from the MFC 7150C and up to 174 locations from the MFC  
7160C. However, available memory will vary with all types of jobs in  
memory and numbers of locations used for broadcasting. If you broadcast  
to more than the maximum locations available, you will not be able to setup  
transmissions using dual access and the timer.  
See  
Setting Up  
Groups for  
Broadcasting  
p. 75  
Although the easiest way to broadcast is to press Group keys, you can  
include One Touch, Speed Dial, and manually dialed numbers in the same  
Help/Broadcast  
broadcast. You must press  
between each of these locations. Use  
the Telephone Index to help you choose the numbers easily.  
After the broadcast is completed, a Broadcast Report will be printed  
automatically to let you know the results.  
Stop  
To stop the broadcasting in progress, press  
. The LCD display asks  
if you want to cancel all locations or only the location that is being  
sent.  
Enter the long dialing sequence numbers as you normally would, but  
keep in mind that each key counts as one location, so the number of  
locations you can call becomes limited.  
If the line is busy or for some other reasons a connection could not be  
made while broadcasting, the MFC will redial the number  
automatically.  
Stop  
Start  
If the memory is full, press  
to abort the job or press  
to send  
the portion that is in the memory (if more than one page has been  
scanned.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
68  
Insert the document into the feeder.  
1
2
Enter a number using One Touch, Speed Dial, Group number, Tel-index  
or the dial pad.  
Example: Group number  
Help/Broadcast  
Press  
. You will be prompted to press the next number.  
3
4
Enter the next number.  
Example: Speed Dial  
Help/Broadcast  
Press  
.
5
6
Enter the fax number.  
Example: Manual dialing, using the dial pad.  
Start  
Press  
.
7
Your MFC will read the documents into memory and then start sending  
faxes to the numbers you entered.  
Previously entered jobs still in memory will be sent first.  
Multiple Resolution Transmission  
Use this feature to select separate resolution settings for each page of the  
fax you’re sending. This could be useful if you’re sending a fax with  
photos and letters, or some pages with small print and others with normal  
print. Resolution settings return to STANDARD after the fax is sent.  
Function  
1
3
4
Insert documents in the feeder, then press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
Set  
Use  
or  
to select resolution for page 1, then press  
.
Repeat Step 2 for subsequent pages.  
Stop  
Press  
when you’re finished. The screen displays  
ACCEPTED  
OTHER SETTINGS?  
1.YES 2.NO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P S E N D  
69  
1
Press  
if you want to select additional settings. The display returns to  
5
2
the SETUP SEND menu—OR—Press  
if you are finished choosing  
settings, and go to step 6. The screen prompts you to enter the fax  
number you want to call.  
Enter the fax number you’re calling.  
6
7
Start  
Press  
.
Setting Up for Polling Transmit  
Polling Transmit is when you set up your MFC to wait with a document so  
another fax machine can retrieve it.  
Place document to be retrieved in the feeder.  
1
2
3
Function  
1
3
8
Press  
,
,
,
.
The screen displays  
POLLED TX:OFF?  
SELECT <- -> & SET  
Press  
Press  
or  
to choose ON.  
4
5
Set  
. The screen displays  
1.DOC 2.MEMORY  
1
2
Press  
Press  
Press  
or  
.
to make your selection.  
6
7
8
Stop  
Start  
and wait for the fax to be polled.  
Once you set this feature, you will have to interrupt the timer to send a fax  
Function  
1
5
(
,
,
).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N  
70  
Interrupting Delayed Fax and Polling Transmit Jobs  
You can send a fax or make a copy now, even if you have the MFC set to  
send a fax later, or if you have it set to be polled. However, you cannot use  
automatic redial or the function mode.  
Function  
1
5
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
Wait 2 seconds, then remove the documents that are waiting in the feeder.  
INSERT DOCUMENT  
ONLINE  
Place the document you want to send now in the feeder.  
Enter the number for the fax you want to send now.  
Start  
3
4
5
6
7
Press  
.
After the transmission is finished, return the first document to the feeder.  
Function  
1
5
Press  
,
,
to restore the Delayed Fax or Polling Transmit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
C H A P T E R E I G H T  
Setup Auto Dial  
Numbers  
8
Storing Numbers for Easy Dialing  
You can set up your MFC to do three types of easy dialing: One Touch,  
Speed Dial, and Groups for Broadcasting of faxes.  
Storing One Touch Dial Numbers  
See  
One Touch  
Dialing  
You can store 24 fax/phone numbers that you can dial by pressing one key.  
You also can store names with these numbers. When you press a One Touch  
dial location, the screen displays the name or number as the call is dialed.  
p. 78  
One Touch keys are not the dial pad keys. They are the 12 keys (numbers  
01–24) located to the right of the dial pad.  
Number 13-24 are accessed by holding down shift while you press the  
appropriate One Touch key.  
Function  
1
6
1
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
Press the One Touch key where you want to store a number. To store a  
Shift  
number in locations 13–24, press shift (  
), then press a key.  
(One-Touch key 01 is pre-programmed for Brother Fax-Back System,  
USA only. You can override it if you wish.) The screen displays the  
location you selected.  
Enter a number (up to 20 digits). If you want to enter a pause in the  
dialing sequence (to wait for an “outside line,” for example), press  
3
4
Redial/Pause  
Redial/Pause  
as you’re entering digits. Pressing  
enters a  
3.5 second pause when the number is dialed, and a dash appears on the  
screen.  
Set  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to enter a name for this number.  
NAME:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T  
72  
Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters). You can use  
5
6
Set  
the chart on page 37 to help you enter letters—OR—Press  
and go to  
Step 6 to store the number without a name.  
Set  
Press  
Use  
. The screen prompts you to select the type of number this is.  
or  
to select the type you want.  
a fax only number  
FAX  
TEL  
a telephone (voice) number  
FAX/TEL both a fax and telephone (voice) number  
Set  
Press  
.
7
8
Stop  
Return to Step 2 to store another One Touch number—OR—Press  
to  
exit.  
When you dial an AUTO DIAL number, the screen displays the name  
you’ve stored, or, if you haven’t stored a name, the number you’ve stored.  
If you need to store a pause longer than 3.5 seconds, please call Brother  
Customer Service at 1-800-284-4329 (USA), 1-800-853-6660 (from within  
Canada), or 1-514-685-6464 (from within Montreal).  
You can use two or more One Touch keys to store a long dialing sequence.  
For example, to store 9 1 201 555 1234 987 65 4321, divide the number  
into two parts. Store the first part on one key  
9 1 201 555 1234  
and the last part of the number on another key.  
987 65 4321  
Now, when you dial, just press the two One Touch keys (one after the other,  
in order) where you’ve stored the two parts of the number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P A U T O D I A L N U M B E R S  
73  
Storing Speed Dial Numbers  
See  
Speed Dialing  
p. 78  
You can store Speed Dial numbers, so when you dial you only have to press  
three keys. The MFC 7150C has 56 Speed Dial locations and the MFC  
7160C has 100 Speed Dial locations. Even if you lose electrical power,  
numbers stored in memory will not be lost.  
Function  
1
6
2
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to enter a location.  
1
SPEED-DIAL? #  
Use the dial pad to enter a two-digit location.  
(use numbers 01-56 for the MFC 7150C or 00-99 for the MFC 7160C.)  
2
3
Set  
Press  
. The screen displays your entry, then prompts you to enter the  
number you’re storing.  
#05:  
ENTER & SET  
Enter the number (up to 20 digits).  
4
5
Set  
Press  
. The screen now prompts you to store a name with this  
number.  
NAME:  
Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters). You can use  
6
Set  
the chart on page 37 to help you enter letters—OR—Press  
and go to  
Step 8 to store the number without a name.  
Set  
Press  
.
7
8
The screen prompts you to select the type of number this is. Use  
to select the type you want.  
or  
FAX  
TEL  
A fax number  
A telephone (voice) number  
FAX/TEL Both a fax and telephone number  
Set  
Press  
.
9
Stop  
Return to Step 2 to store another Speed Dial number—OR—Press  
exit.  
to  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T  
74  
Changing One Touch and  
Speed Dial Numbers  
If you try to store a One Touch or Speed Dial number in a location where a  
number is already stored, the screen displays the current name stored there,  
then prompts you to either  
1. CHANGEOR2. EXIT.  
1
2
Press  
to change the number stored, or press  
to exit without  
1
2
making a change.  
Enter a new number.  
Clear  
If you want to erase the whole number, press  
when the cursor  
is to the left of the digits. The letters above and to the right of the  
cursor are deleted.  
If you want to change a digit, use  
or  
to position the cursor  
under the digit you want to change, then type over it.  
Follow the directions beginning at Step 4 in Storing One Touch  
Numbers or Step 5 in Storing Speed Dial Numbers.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T U P A U T O D I A L N U M B E R S  
75  
Setting Up Groups for Broadcasting  
See  
Storing  
Groups allow you to send the same fax message to many fax numbers by  
pressing only one One Touch key (Broadcasting). First, you’ll need to  
store each fax number as a One Touch or Speed Dial number. Then, you  
can combine them into a Group. Each Group uses up a One Touch key.  
Finally, you can have up to six small Groups, or you can assign up to 79  
numbers (for MFC 7150C) or 123 numbers (for MFC 7160C) to one large  
Group.  
One Touch Dial  
Numbers  
p. 71  
and  
Storing Speed Dial  
Numbers  
p. 73  
and  
Broadcasting  
pp. 67–68  
Function  
6
3
1
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
SELECT ONE-TOUCH  
Select a One Touch key where you wish to store the Group number.  
2
02  
(For example, press One Touch key  
.)  
SETUP GROUP:GO  
ENTER & SET  
1
Use the dial pad to enter the Group number (for example, press  
Group 1).  
for  
3
Set  
Press  
.
4
5
To include One Touch or Speed Dial numbers in the Group, enter them  
as if you were dialing. For example, for One Touch number 5, press  
05  
One Touch key  
. For Speed Dial location 09, press the Speed Dial  
0
9
button, then press  
,
on the dial pad. The LCD shows 05, #09.  
G01:*O5#O9  
Set  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to enter a name.  
6
7
NAME:  
ENTER & SET  
Use the dial pad and the chart on page 37 to enter a name for the group  
(for example, NEW CLIENTS).  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
8
9
Stop  
to exit.  
You can print a list of all One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. See  
Chapter 11, Printing Reports.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
C H A P T E R N I N E  
Telephone  
( )  
Voice  
9
Operation  
Dialing Options  
You can use your MFC to make voice telephone calls, by dialing manually,  
or by using Tel-index, One Touch or Speed Dial memory. You can use the  
handset, or, if you have the MFC 7160C, you can use the Speakerphone to  
make and receive calls.  
The Speaker Phone allows you to operate the phone hands free, or allows  
more than one person in the room to partcipate in a two-way phone  
conversation. When using the Speaker Phone, make sure to speak clearly  
and close to the microphone.  
Manual Dialing  
Manual dialing is simply pressing all of the digits of the phone number.  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
Pick up the handset—OR—Press  
or  
.
1
2
3
When you hear a dial tone, dial the call, using the dial pad.  
Hook  
If you pressed  
to dial the call, pick up the handset when the other  
party answers. (The speaker works only one way; the other party won’t  
be able to hear you unless you pick up the handset.)  
On the MFC 7160C, you can switch from handset to Speaker Phone by  
Speaker Phone  
pressing  
, then replacing the handset. You can switch from  
Speaker Phone to handset by lifting the handset.  
Speaker Phone  
To hang up, replace the handset—OR—Press  
.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R N I N E  
78  
One Touch Dialing  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
Pick up the handset—OR—Press  
or  
.
See  
Storing  
1
2
When you hear a dial tone, press the One Touch key of the location you  
want to call.  
one Touch Dial  
Numbers  
p. 71  
Hook  
If you pressed  
to dial the call, pick up the handset when the other  
party answers. (The speaker works only one way; the other party won’t  
be able to hear you unless you pickup the handset.)  
3
Speaker Phone  
To hang up, replace the handset—OR—Press  
.
4
If you try to use a One Touch location with no number stored in it, you hear  
a warning sound, and screen displays NOT REGISTERED. The display  
returns to normal after 2 seconds.  
Start  
If you are sending a fax, press  
picked up the handset, press  
with fax tones.  
after pressing the One Touch key. If you  
when the receiving fax machine answers  
Start  
Speed Dialing  
See  
Storing Speed  
Dial Numbers  
p. 73  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
Pick up the handset—OR—Press  
or  
.
1
2
Speed Dial  
When you hear a dial tone, press  
Speed Dial number.  
, then press the two-digit  
Hook  
If you pressed  
to dial the call, pick up the handset when the other  
3
party answers. (The speaker works only one way; the other party won’t  
be able to hear you unless you pickup the handset.)  
Speaker Phone  
To hang up, replace the handset—OR—Press  
.
4
Start  
If you are sending a fax, press  
you picked up the handset, press  
answers with fax tones.  
after entering the Speed Dial number. If  
when the receiving fax machine  
Start  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T E L E P H O N E ( V O I C E ) O P E R A T I O N  
79  
Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers  
Sometimes you may want to choose from among several long distance  
carriers when you make a call. Rates may vary depending upon the time  
and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access  
codes or long-distance carriers as One Touch numbers. You can store these  
long dialing sequences by dividing them and setting them up on separate  
keys in any combination. You can even include manual dialing using the  
dial pad. The combined number will be dialed in the order you entered it. as  
Start  
See  
Storing  
one Touch Dial  
Numbers  
p. 71  
soon as you press  
.
03  
02  
You can store "555" on One Touch key  
and "7000" on One Touch key  
, you can dial "555-7000". To  
. If  
03  
02  
Start  
you press One Touch  
,
, and  
temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number with manual  
dialing using the dial pad. For example, to change the number to 555-7001 you  
03  
7
0
0
1
could press One Touch  
and press  
,
,
,
using the dialing pad.  
If you must wait for another dial tone at any point in the dialing sequence,  
Redial/Pause  
stare a pause at that point in the number by pressing  
press adds a 3.5 second delay.  
. Each key  
Hold  
Hold  
Press  
to put a call on Hold.  
1
2
3
You can replace the handset without disconnecting the call.  
Speaker Phone  
Pick up the MFC handset—OR—Press  
from Hold. Picking up an extension handset will not release the call from  
Hold.  
to release the call  
Pause  
Redial/Pause  
Press  
to insert a 3.5 second pause between numbers. If you are  
Redial/Pause  
dialing overseas, you can press  
increase the length of the pause.  
as many times as needed to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R N I N E  
80  
Tone/Pulse  
If you have pulse dialing service, but need to send tone signals (for  
telephone banking, for example), follow the directions below. If you have  
touch tone service, you do not need this feature to send tone signals.  
Lift the handset.  
1
2
3
Press  
. Any digits dialed after this send tone signals.  
When you hang up, the MFC returns to pulse dialing service.  
Searching Telephone Index  
See  
Storing One  
Touch Dial  
Numbers  
p. 71  
You can search for names you have stored in One Touch and Speed Dial  
memories. Names are stored alphabetically.  
Tel-index  
Press  
Press  
, then enter the first letter of the name you’re looking for.  
to search the memory.  
1
2
3
or  
and  
When the screen displays the name you want to call, pick up the  
Storing Speed  
Dial Numbers  
p. 73  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
handset or press  
or  
.
Start  
Press  
to begin dialing.  
4
5
Hook  
If you pressed  
to dial the call, pick up the handset when the other  
party answers. (The speaker works only one way; the other party won’t  
be able to hear you unless you pick up the handset.)  
Speaker Phone  
When the call is over, hang up—OR—Press  
call.  
to cancel the  
6
Answering Calls with the Speaker Phone  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
Speaker Phone  
When the MFC rings, instead of lifting the handset, press  
Speak clearly, toward the microphone. To end the call, press  
.
Speaker Phone  
.
If you have a bad telephone line connection, the other party might hear your  
voice echoed during the call. Hang up and try the call again—OR—Pick up  
the handset.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
C H A P T E R T E N  
Remote Fax  
Options  
10  
(For MFC 7150C Only)  
This chapter is for Model MFC 7150C. If you have model MFC 7160C, your  
remote fax options are handled by the Message Center, Chapter 12.  
Fax Forwarding/Paging  
You cannot use Paging and Fax Forwarding at the same time.  
You cannot use Paging and Fax Forwarding when Fax Storage is set to OFF.  
Programming a Fax Forwarding Number  
When Fax Forwarding is set to ON, your MFC stores the received fax in  
memory, then dials the fax number you’ve programmed, and forwards the  
fax message.  
Function  
1
8
1
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
until the screen displays  
FAX FORWARD?  
Set  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to enter the number of the fax  
3
machine where faxes will be forwarded.  
FWD#:  
ENTER & SET  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T E N  
82  
Enter the forwarding number (up to 20 digits).  
4
5
6
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
Stop  
to exit.  
Programming Paging Number  
When Paging is selected, your MFC dials the pager number you’ve  
programmed, and dials your Personal Identification Number (PIN) when  
connected, to activate your pager and let you know you have a fax message  
in the memory.  
Function  
1
8
1
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
until the screen displays  
PAGING?  
Set  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to enter your pager number.  
3
PAG#:  
ENTER & SET  
Enter your pager phone number (up to 20 digits) followed by  
Do not include the area code if it is the same as that of your MFC. For  
.
4
1
8
0
0
5
5
5
1
2
3
4
example,  
.
Set  
Press  
.
5
6
Redial/Pause  
If your pager requires a PIN, enter the PIN, press  
enter your MFC telephone number, then press  
, press  
For example,  
,
Redial/Pause  
1
2
3
4
5
1
8
0
0
5
2
1
2
8
4
6
.
OR—  
If you do not need a PIN, press  
MFC, then press . For example,  
Redial/Pause  
, enter the fax number of your  
Redial/Pause  
1
8
0
0
5
2
1
2
8
4
6
.
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
7
8
Stop  
to exit.  
You cannot change a Paging number or PIN remotely.  
Redial/Pause  
Press  
for each 3.5 second delay, as needed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R E M O T E F A X O P T I O N S ( F O R M F C 7 1 5 0 C O N L Y )  
83  
Setting Fax Storage  
If you set Fax Storage to ON, you will be able to retrieve fax messages from  
another location, using Fax Forwarding, Paging, or Remote Retrieval  
functions. The screen will indicate when you have a fax stored in memory.  
The memory can store up to 100 pages of faxes.  
Function  
1
8
2
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to choose a fax  
1
setting.  
FAX STORAGE:OFF?  
SELECT & SET  
Press  
or  
to select ON (or OFF).  
2
3
4
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
Stop  
If there are faxes in memory when you turn the Fax Storage OFF, the  
screens prompts you to erase any faxes in memory.  
ERASE ALL FAX?  
1.YES 2.NO  
See  
Printing a  
Fax in Memory  
p. 48  
1
If you press  
, all fax data is erased and Fax Storage is turned off. If you  
2
press  
, data is not erased, and Fax Storage remains on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T E N  
84  
Changing Remote Access Code  
Enter your Remote Access Code when the MFC picks up your call, so you can  
access features remotely. The access code is preset to 1 5 9 , but you can  
change this.  
See  
Function  
1
8
3
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
Operation  
from Extension  
Telephone  
Enter a three-digit number from 000 to 999. The “ ” cannot be changed.  
Do not use the same digits that appear in your Fax Receive Code or  
Telephone Answer Code.  
pp. 47–48  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
3
4
Stop  
to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R E M O T E F A X O P T I O N S ( F O R M F C 7 1 5 0 C O N L Y )  
85  
Remote Retrieval  
You can call your MFC from any fax machine using touch tone, then use the  
Remote Access Code and other button presses to retrieve fax messages.  
Using Remote Access Code  
Dial your MFC phone number from a fax machine using touch tone.  
1
2
When your MFC answers and beeps, immediately enter your Remote  
Access Code (1 5 9 ).  
The MFC signals the kinds of messages received:  
1 long beep — Fax message(s)  
3
No long beeps — No messages  
The MFC then prompts you with two short beeps to enter a command.  
If you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command, the MFC hangs  
up. If you enter an invalid command, the MFC beeps three times.  
4
9
0
Press  
to reset the MFC when you’re finished.  
5
6
Hang up.  
If your MFC is set to Manual mode, you can access it by waiting about 2  
minutes, then entering the Remote Access Code within 30 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T E N  
86  
Remote Commands  
Follow the commands below to access features remotely. When you call the  
MFC and enter your Remote Access Code (1 5 9 ), the system will signal  
you with two short beeps to enter a remote control command.  
Remote Control Commands  
Details Operation  
95 Changing Fax Forwarding  
/Paging setting  
1 OFF  
If you hear one long beep, the change is accepted. If you hear  
three short beeps, you cannot change it because the conditions  
have not been met (Example: registering paging number). You  
can register your fax forwarding number by using 4. FAX  
FWD NO (see page 87). Once you have registered the  
number, the MFC will change automatically to FAXFWD:ON  
mode. Then retrieve a Memory Status List by entering 961  
(see page 87) to make sure that the Fax Forwarding number  
you registered is correct in the List.  
2 Fax Forwarding  
3 Paging  
4 FAX FWD No.  
6 Fax Storage ON  
7 Fax Storage OFF  
You can turn FAX STORAGE ON or OFF.  
96 Retrieve FAX  
1 Memory Status List  
2 Retrieve all faxes  
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive the  
Memory Status List or stored fax message(s). (See page  
86.)  
3 Erase fax from the  
memory  
If you hear one long beep, you can erase fax message(s)  
from the memory.  
97 Check the receiving status  
1 FAX  
You can check whether your MFC has received any fax  
message(s). If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you  
will hear three short beeps.  
98 Change Answer Mode  
1 TAD  
If you hear one long beep, you can change the Answer  
Mode. If you hear three short beeps, you cannot change it.  
2 FAX/TEL  
3 FAX  
After a long beep, you can exit remote control.  
90 Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R E M O T E F A X O P T I O N S ( F O R M F C 7 1 5 0 C O N L Y )  
87  
Retrieving Memory Status List  
You can retrieve the Memory Status List from a remote fax machine to see  
if you have any fax messages.  
Dial your MFC’s number.  
1
2
When you hear the beep, immediately enter your Remote Access Code  
1
5
9
(
).  
9
6
1
When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press  
.
3
4
Using the dial pad, enter the number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax  
machine where you want the Memory Status List forwarded, and then  
press  
.
You cannot use  
pause, press  
and  
as dial numbers. However, if you want to store a  
.
After you hear your MFC beep, hang up and wait.  
5
Your MFC calls the remote fax machine. The remote fax machine prints  
the Memory Status List.  
Retrieving Fax Messages  
Dial your MFC’s number.  
1
2
When you hear the beep, immediately enter your Remote Access Code  
1
5
9
(
).  
9
6
2
As soon as you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press  
.
3
4
Using the dial pad, enter the number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax  
machine where you want your fax messages forwarded, and then press  
.
You cannot use  
a pause, press  
and  
as dial numbers. However, if you want to store  
.
After you hear your MFC beep, hang up and wait.  
5
Your MFC calls the remote fax machine. The remote fax machine prints  
your fax messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T E N  
88  
Changing Fax Forwarding Number  
You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number from a  
remote fax machine.  
Dial your MFC’s number.  
1
2
When you hear the beep, immediately enter your Remote Access Code  
1
5
9
(
).  
9
5
4
When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press  
.
3
4
Enter the new number of the remote fax machine where you want your  
fax messages forwarded, and then press  
.
You cannot use  
a pause, press  
and  
as dial numbers. However, if you want to store  
.
To retrieve the Memory Status List, when you hear two short beeps, use  
5
6
7
9
6
1
the dial pad to press  
Use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine (up to  
20 digits), and then press  
.
.
After you hear your MFC beep, hang up and wait.  
Your MFC calls the remote fax machine. The remote fax machine prints  
the Memory Status List showing the new forwarding number.  
Check the forwarding number.  
8
If the forwarding number is incorrect, return to Step 1 to reset it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
C H A P T E R E L E V E N  
Printing  
Reports  
11  
MFC Settings and Activity  
You can print the following lists and reports:  
Choose if you would like a  
Transmission Verification Report  
printed after all faxes you send.  
1.XMIT REPORT  
2.ACT.REPORT  
Activity Report lists information  
about the last 50 incoming and  
outgoing faxes. TX means  
Transmit; RX means Receive.  
Lists names and numbers stored in  
One Touch and Speed Dial  
3.ALL DIAL  
memory, in numerical order.  
ALL DIAL list (above),  
alphabetically.  
4.TEL.INDEX  
Lists settings for INITIAL SETUP,  
SETUP RECEIVE, SETUP  
SEND, PRINT REPORTS, and  
TEL SERVICE. The settings for  
REMOTE FAX OPT (for MFC  
7150C only) and  
5.USER SETTINGS  
SETUP MSG CTR (for MFC  
7160C only) are included.  
Lists summary information and  
amount of occupied memory.  
6.MEMORY STATUS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E L E V E N  
90  
To Print a Report  
See  
Printing  
Reports  
p. 89  
Function  
1
7
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
Enter the number of the report you want to print. For example,  
4
press  
Press  
Press  
to print the TEL-INDEX.  
Start  
Stop  
.
3
4
to exit.  
Transmission Verification (Xmit) Report  
You can use the Xmit Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists  
the name or fax number of the receiving party, the time and date of  
transmission, and if the transmission was successful.  
When the feature is OFF, the report is printed automatically only if there’s an  
error during transmission. If the report indicates NG, send the document again.  
When the feature is ON, the report is printed with every fax you send.  
Function  
1
7
1
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
or  
to select ON or OFF.  
Set  
.
Stop  
to exit.  
Activity Report Interval  
You can set the MFC to print activity reports at a specific interval (6, 12, 24  
hours, 2, 4 or 7 days). If you set the interval to OFF, you can print the  
report by following the steps in the previous section.  
Function  
1
7
2
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
to display:  
INTERVAL?  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
3
4
or  
to choose your setting. If you choose 7 days, the screen  
prompts you to choose a day at which to begin the 7-day countdown.  
Set  
When the screen displays the setting you want, press  
.
5
6
Enter the time to begin printing, in 24-hour format. (For example, enter  
19:45 for 7:45 PM).  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
7
8
Stop  
to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
Message Center  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
12  
Introduction  
This section explains about how to operate the Message Center features of  
your MFC 7160C.  
Your MFC has been designed to be user-friendly. You will find a function  
chart on page 33 that shows you the easy button presses you can perform to  
access all programmed features.  
Message Center Mode  
See  
Recording  
Message Center  
Outgoing  
Message Center Mode allows you to store incoming fax and voice messages  
in a flexible memory. The memory stores 99 minutes of voice messages, or  
up to 300 pages of fax memory. Any voice or fax message can be retrieved  
remotely. Memory is shared between fax and voice messages, which are  
stored on a “first-come, first-served” basis.  
Message  
pp. 93–94  
You must record an outgoing message in order to use the Message Center  
Mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
92  
Flexible Memory Settings (Message Storage)  
Message Center Mode offers you six flexible memory settings, so that you  
can decide which kinds of messages you want to receive.  
1. FAX:ON VOICE:ON Both voice and fax messages are stored. You can  
use the Fax Forwarding or Paging features and  
retrieve voice and fax messages remotely.  
2. FAX:ON VOICE:EXT You need an external answering machine  
connected to the EXT jack for this setting. Fax  
messages are stored in the message center  
memory, but voice messages are stored in your  
external answering machine. Retrieve messages  
from the external answering machine. You cannot  
use the Paging feature for voice messages with  
this setting.  
3. FAX:ON VOICE:OFF All memory is used to store fax messages—no  
voice messages will be stored.  
4. FAX:OFF VOICE:ON All memory is used to store voice messages—no  
fax messages will be stored. Incoming faxes will  
be printed on paper. You can use the Paging  
feature, and retrieve voice messages remotely.  
5. FAX:OFF VOICE:EXT You need an external answering machine connected to  
the EXT jack for this setting. Incoming faxes are not  
stored in memory, but will be printed on paper. Voice  
messages are stored in the external answering machine.  
6. FAX:OFF VOICE:OFF Incoming faxes are not stored in memory, but will  
be printed on paper. Voice calls are not stored in  
memory.  
Setting Up Message Center  
You must set up Message Center in the following order :  
Turn Message Storage ON. (See p. 93.)  
1
2
Record Message Center Outgoing Message (MSG CTR OGM).  
(See pp. 93–94.)  
Activate Message Center Mode. (See p. 94.)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M E S S A G E C E N T E R ( F O R M F C 7 1 6 0 C O N L Y )  
93  
Setting Message Storage  
Select the setting from the descriptions on page 92.  
Function  
1
8
1
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to choose a FAX  
1
setting.  
FAX:OFF?  
SELECT  
& SET  
Press  
or  
to select ON (or OFF).  
2
3
Set  
Press  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to choose a VOICE setting.  
VOICE:ON?  
SELECT  
& SET  
or  
to select your setting from the list on page 92  
4
(ON, OFF, EXT).  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
5
6
Stop  
to exit.  
Recording Message Center Outgoing Message (OGM)  
Recording the Message Center Outgoing Message (MSG CTR OGM) is the  
second step you need to follow before you can turn on the Message Center.  
Make sure your OGM is less than 20 seconds long.  
Function  
1
8
3
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to choose an OGM.  
1
MSG CTR OGM?  
SELECT  
& SET  
Press  
or  
to reach  
2
MSG CTR OGM?  
This is the only setting you can select if you want to turn the Message  
Center on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
94  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
3
4
Record  
, then pick up the handset to record a message.  
See  
Record F/T  
OGM  
(FAX/TEL  
Outgoing  
Message)  
p. 44  
For example: Hello. We are unable to take your call at this time.  
Please leave a message after the signal. If you wish to send a fax,  
please  
press  
5 1, wait for fax tones, then press Start on your fax machine.  
Replace the handset. The Message Center plays your OGM.  
5
6
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Listening to Outgoing Message (OGM)  
Function  
1
8
3
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
or  
to select MSG CTR OGM (or F/T OGM).  
Set  
when the screen displays your selection.  
Play  
Press  
or  
to hear the OGM. Adjust volume by pressing Volume  
.
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
5
Erasing Outgoing Message (OGM)  
Function  
1
8
3
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
or  
to select MSG CTR OGM (or F/T OGM).  
Set  
when the screen displays your selection.  
Erase  
.
1
2
to erase the OGM—OR—Press  
to exit without erasing.  
Stop  
to exit.  
Activating Message Center Mode  
See  
Setting Up  
Message Center  
p. 92  
Mode  
Press  
on.  
on the control panel until both the FAX and FAX/TEL lights are  
FAX  
FAX/TEL  
Message Indicators  
Once you return home or to the office you can easily and quickly see if any  
voice or fax messages have been stored in the Message Center. There are  
two ways to determine if messages are stored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M E S S A G E C E N T E R ( F O R M F C 7 1 6 0 C O N L Y )  
95  
If the VOICE and/or Fax Indicator lights are flashing, there is a new  
message stored. Once a new voice message is played, the VOICE indicator  
light stops flashing and stays on. And once a new fax message is printed,  
the Fax indicator light will turn off.  
Voice  
Fax  
The LCD display will indicate the total number of incoming VOICE and/or  
FAX messages stored in Message Center memory. The number of VOICE  
includes the Memo messages.  
VOICE:03 FAX:02  
ONLINE  
Playing Voice Messages and Memos  
Follow the steps below to listen to voice messages and memos.  
Play  
Press  
. Adjust Volume by pressing  
or  
.
1
All messages and memos are played in the order they were recorded. The  
display shows the number of the current message, and the total number  
of messages.  
If Caller ID information was received, the MFC beeps during the  
message and displays the Caller ID information for one second.  
During playback, the screen displays the time and date the message was  
recorded.  
Press  
at the end of the message to repeat a message. Press  
to  
2
3
skip to the next message. You can press  
reach the message you want to play.  
and  
repeatedly until you  
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Printing a Fax Message  
Once you print a new fax message stored in memory, it is erased from the  
memory automatically.  
Play  
Press  
. After two seconds, the MFC begins to play voice messages.  
1
2
After playing voice messages, the display asks if you want to print fax  
messages that are in the memory. There is no display message if there  
are no faxes.  
PRINT FAX?  
1.YES 2.NO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
96  
1
To print the faxes in memory, press  
3
OR—  
2
Press  
to exit without printing.  
Backup Printing Option  
When you choose FAX: ON in the Message Center mode, all incoming fax  
messages are stored in the available memory for retrieval. To print a backup  
copy automatically, turn this option on.  
Function  
1
8
2
Press  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to select a setting.  
1
BACKUP PRINT:ON  
SELECT & SET  
Press  
Press  
Press  
or  
to display ON (or OFF).  
2
3
4
Set  
when the screen displays your selected setting.  
to exit.  
Stop  
Erasing Messages  
If you choose to erase all fax messages, the MFC will print any previously  
unprinted fax messages before erasing them from memory. Fax messages  
cannot be erased individually.  
You can erase voice messages and memos individually, or all at once.  
To erase voice messages individually  
Play  
Press  
. After two seconds, the MFC beeps and begins message  
1
playback. Each message is preceded by one long beep, and followed by  
two short beeps.  
Erase  
To erase a specific message, press  
immediately after the two short  
2
beeps, or while the message is playing. The screen prompts  
ERASE THIS MSG.?  
1.YES 2.NO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M E S S A G E C E N T E R ( F O R M F C 7 1 6 0 C O N L Y )  
97  
1
Press  
to erase the message  
3
4
OR—  
2
Press  
to cancel.  
to exit.  
Stop  
Press  
To erase messages all at once  
Erase  
Press  
. The screen displays  
1
ERASE ALL VOICE?  
SELECT <- -> & SET  
Press  
or  
to select erasing all voice messages (VOICE), all  
2
document messages (FAX), or all messages—both voice and fax—  
(MSG).  
Set  
Press  
Press  
Press  
.
3
4
1
2
to erase —OR—  
to cancel.  
Setting Maximum Time for Incoming Messages  
Your MFC comes set to receive voice messages up to 30 seconds long. You  
can change this setting to any length from 20 seconds to 60 seconds, in  
5-second increments. This setting also applies to Memo.  
Function  
1
8
4
Press  
time.  
,
,
,
. The screen prompts you to select a maximum  
1
MESSAGE 30 SEC?  
SELECT & SET  
Press  
messages.  
or  
to select the maximum time setting for incoming  
2
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays your setting.  
to exit.  
3
4
Stop  
Press  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
98  
Setting Toll Saver  
See  
Setting  
Ring Delay  
p. 42  
When you set the toll saver feature, the MFC answers after four rings if you  
don’t have messages, and after two rings if you do have messages. This way,  
when you call the MFC, if it rings three times, you know you have no  
messages, and can hang up, avoiding any toll charge.  
When Toll Saver is ON, it overrides your Ring Delay setting. Toll Saver  
must be off for the MFC to operate using your Ring Delay setting.  
Function  
1
2
1
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
or  
to select TOLL SAVER (or RING DELAY).  
Set  
when the screen displays your selection.  
or to select ON.  
Set  
.
Stop  
to exit.  
ICM Recording Monitor  
This feature lets you turn OFF (or ON) the speaker volume for voice  
messages. When you turn the monitor OFF, you will not hear messages as  
they come in.  
Function  
1
8
5
Press  
Use  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
4
or  
to select OFF (or ON).  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
Stop  
Recording a Memo  
A memo is stored and played as a voice message.  
Record  
Press  
.
1
2
When the display prompts you to pick up the handset, speak into the  
handset to record your memo. Your recording can be as long as the  
Function  
1
8
4
Incoming Message Maximum Time (  
,
,
,
).  
Stop  
Press  
or replace the handset when you’re finished.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M E S S A G E C E N T E R ( F O R M F C 7 1 6 0 C O N L Y )  
99  
Recording a Conversation  
Record  
You can record a telephone conversation by pressing  
during the  
conversation. Your recording can be as long as the Incoming Message  
Maximum Time. You and the other party will hear a beep every 15 seconds  
while recording. You cannot record a conversation using the Speaker Phone.  
Fax Forwarding/Paging  
When Paging is set to ON, your MFC dials the pager number you’ve  
programmed, and dials your Personal Identification Number (PIN) when  
connected, to activate your pager and let you know you have a fax or voice  
message in the Message Center memory.  
When Fax Forwarding is set to ON, your MFC dials the fax number you’ve  
programmed, and forwards any faxes you’ve received.  
You cannot use Paging and Fax Forwarding at the same time.  
Programming a Fax Forwarding Number  
Function  
1
8
6
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
until the screen displays  
FAX FORWARD?  
Set  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to enter the number of the fax  
3
machine where faxes will be forwarded.  
FWD#:  
ENTER & SET  
Enter the forwarding number (up to 20 digits).  
4
5
6
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
Stop  
to exit.  
You can change a Fax Forwarding number remotely (See page 104).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
100  
Programming Paging Number  
Function  
1
8
6
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
until the screen displays  
PAGING?  
Set  
Press  
. The screen prompts you to enter your pager number.  
3
PAG#:  
ENTER & SET  
Enter your pager phone number (up to 20 digits) followed by  
Do not include the area code if it is the same as that of your MFC. For  
.
4
1
8
0
0
5
5
5
1
2
3
4
example,  
.
Set  
Press  
.
5
6
Redial/Pause  
If your pager requires a PIN, enter the PIN, press  
enter your MFC telephone number, then press  
, press  
. For example,  
,
Redial/Pause  
1
2
3
4
5
1
8
0
0
5
2
1
2
8
4
6
.
OR—  
Redial/Pause  
If you do not need a PIN, press  
of your MFC, then press  
, enter the telephone number  
. For example,  
Redial/Pause  
1
8
0
0
5
2
1
2
8
4
6
.
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
7
8
Stop  
to exit.  
You cannot change a Paging number or PIN remotely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M E S S A G E C E N T E R ( F O R M F C 7 1 6 0 C O N L Y )  
101  
Remote Retrieval  
This section is for the MFC 7160C. (If you have the MFC 7150C, please see  
Chapter 10 for your remote fax options.) You can call your MFC from a fax  
machine using touch tone and use the Remote Access Code and other button  
presses to retrieve voice (and fax) messages. You can also program and  
change some settings for your Message Center.  
Using Remote Access Code  
Dial your MFC phone number from a fax machine using touch tone.  
1
2
When your MFC answers and beeps, immediately enter your Remote Access  
Code.  
The MFC signals the kinds of messages received:  
1 long beep—Fax message(s)  
3
2 long beeps—Voice message(s)  
3 long beeps—Fax and Voice message(s)  
No beeps—No messages  
The MFC then prompts you with two short beeps to enter a command.  
If you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command, the MFC hangs  
up. If you enter an invalid command, the MFC beeps three times.  
4
9
0
Press  
,
to reset the MFC when you finish.  
5
6
Hang up.  
If your MFC is set to MANUAL mode, you can access the Message Center by  
waiting about 2 minutes, then entering the Remote Access Code within 30  
seconds.  
Changing Remote Access Code  
Enter your Remote Access Code when the MFC picks up your call, so you can  
access features remotely. The access code is preset to 159 , but you can  
change this.  
See  
Operation from  
Extension  
Telephone  
pp. 47–48  
Function  
1
8
7
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
Enter a three-digit number from 000 to 999. The “ ” cannot be  
changed. Do not use the same digits that appear in your Fax Receive  
Code or Telephone Answer Code.  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
3
4
Stop  
to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
102  
Remote Control Commands  
Follow the commands below to access features remotely. When you call the  
MFC and enter your Remote Access Code (159 ), the system will signal  
you with two short beeps to enter a remote control command.  
Remote Control Commands  
Details Operation  
91 Playing voice messages  
After one long beep, the MFC plays ICMs and Memos.  
1
2
(Skip back)  
(Skip next)  
Press 1 while listening to an ICM or Memo message to play  
it again. If you press 1 before a message, you will reply the  
previous message.  
While playing an ICM or Memo, you can skip to next  
message.  
9 Stop Playing  
Stop playing the ICM and Memo.  
92 Record Memo  
After one long beep, you can record a memo. You can stop  
recording by pressing 9.  
93 Erase all ICM & Memo  
If you hear one long beep, the erase is accepted. If you hear  
three short beeps, you cannot erase because all voice messages  
have not been played, or there is no voice message to erase.  
*This code erases all recorded messages, not one at a time.  
94 Play and Record OGM  
in memory  
1 Play  
1 MSG CTR OGM  
2 F/T OGM  
The MFC plays the selected OGM. You can stop playing  
OGMs by pressing 9.  
After one long beep, you can record the selected OGM. Your  
recorded message will be played when you finish speaking.  
You can stop recording the message by pressing 9.  
2 Record  
1 MSG CTR OGM  
2 F/T OGM  
95 Changing Fax Forwarding/ If you hear one long beep, the change is accepted. If you hear  
Paging setting  
three short beeps, you cannot change it because the conditions  
have not been met (Example: registering paging number). You  
can register your fax forwarding number by using 4. FAX  
FWD NO (see page 104). Once you have registered the  
number, the MFC will automatically change to  
“FAXFWD:ON” mode. Then retrieve a Memory Status List by  
entering 961 (see page 103) to make sure that the Fax  
Forwarding number you registered is correct in the List.  
1 OFF  
2 Fax Forwarding  
3 Paging  
4 FAX FWD NO.  
96 Retrieve Fax  
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive a report  
or stored fax messages. (See page 103.)  
1 Memory Status List  
2 Retrieve all FAX  
3 Erase FAX in the  
memory  
If you hear one long beep, you can erase the fax message  
from the memory.  
97 Check the receiving status  
1 FAX  
You can check whether your MFC has received any FAX or  
VOICE messages. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no,  
you will hear three short beeps.  
2 VOICE  
98 Change Answer Mode  
1 MSG CTR  
If you hear one long beep, you can change the answer mode.  
If you hear three short beeps, you cannot change it (For  
example: When there is no MSG CTR OGM and you tried to  
change to MSG CTR mode.)  
2 FAX/TEL  
3 FAX  
90 Exit  
After a long beep, you can exit remote control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M E S S A G E C E N T E R ( F O R M F C 7 1 6 0 C O N L Y )  
103  
Retrieving Memory Status List  
You can retrieve the Memory Status List from a remote fax machine to see  
if you have any fax messages.  
Dial your MFC number.  
1
2
When you hear the beep, immediately enter your Remote Access Code  
1
5
9
(
).  
9
6
1
When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press  
.
3
4
Using the dial pad, enter the number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax  
machine where you want the Memory Status List forwarded, and then  
press  
.
You cannot use  
pause, press  
and  
as dial numbers. However, if you want to store a  
.
After you hear your MFC beep, hang up and wait.  
5
Your MFC calls the remote fax machine. The remote fax machine prints  
the Memory Status List.  
Retrieving Fax Messages  
Dial your MFC number.  
1
2
When you hear the beep, immediately enter your Remote Access Code  
1
5
9
(
).  
9
6
2
As soon as you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press  
.
3
4
Using the dial pad, enter the number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax  
machine where you want your fax messages forwarded, and then press  
.
You cannot use  
a pause, press  
and  
as dial numbers. However, if you want to store  
.
After you hear your MFC beep, hang up and wait.  
5
Your MFC calls the remote fax machine. The remote fax machine prints  
your fax messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E L V E  
104  
Changing Fax Forwarding Number  
You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number from a  
remote fax machine.  
Dial your MFC number.  
1
2
When you hear the beep, immediately enter your Remote Access Code  
1
5
9
(
).  
9
5
4
When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press  
.
3
4
Enter the new number of the remote fax machine where you want your  
fax messages forwarded, and then press  
.
You cannot use  
and  
as dial numbers. However, if you want to  
store a pause, press  
.
To retrieve the Memory Status List, when you hear two short beeps, use  
5
6
7
9
6
1
the dial pad to press  
Use the dial pad to enter the number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax  
machine, and then press  
.
.
After you hear your MFC beep, hang up and wait.  
Your MFC calls the remote fax machine. The remote fax machine prints  
the Memory Status List showing the new forwarding number.  
Check the forwarding number.  
8
If the new number is incorrect, return to Step 1 to reset it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
Copy  
Operations  
13  
Your Multi-Function Center allows you to make high-quality photocopies  
and transparencies. Copies can be in black and white, one color, or full  
color. Always make sure you have paper in the cassette before making  
copies. Do not pull on the paper while copying is in progress.  
Basic Copy Operations  
Copying One Page  
Insert the document face down in the feeder.  
1
2
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Press  
copy.  
or  
(If you have a MFC7150C, go to Step 4.)to  
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Press  
or  
again. (Make sure it’s the same key you  
3
pressed in Step 2.) The screen displays  
COPYING  
ONLINE  
P.01  
Stop  
Stop  
To stop, press  
. Press  
again to release the original document.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
106  
Making Multiple Copies  
See  
Memory Full  
Message  
You can make multiple copies in black and white or one color using your  
Mono Copy  
MFC. When you use  
, you can choose whether the copies will be  
STACKED (all copies of page 1, then all copies of page 2, etc.) or  
SORTED (collated). The Multiple full color copies feature is available on  
the MFC 7160C only. The SORT option is not available when you use  
p. 116  
Color Copy  
.
Place the document face down in the feeder.  
1
2
3
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Press  
. For the MFC 7160C only, you can press  
.
Using the dial pad, enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).  
3
8
For example, press  
,
for 38 copies.  
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Press  
. For the MFC 7160C only, you can press  
.
4
5
NOTE: You must press the same button you pressed in Step 2.  
Mono Copy  
If you pressed  
, the screen displays  
MULTI COPY:STACK  
ONLINE  
Press  
to select SORT (or STACK),  
MULTI COPY:SORT  
ONLINE  
Mono Copy  
then press  
again.  
You cannot make multiple color copies when you are using MFC memory  
for Memory Transmission or have incoming messages in the Message  
Center. If you get a MEMORY FULL error message, you may be able to  
make multiple copies if you first print incoming faxes in memory and  
restore the memory to 100%.  
When making multiple copies, set the paper size to LETTER  
Function  
1
2
6
(
,
,
,
). If you set it to LEGAL, you will still get only letter  
size printouts.  
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies  
(Temporary Setting)  
Insert the document face down in the feeder.  
1
2
Enlarge/Reduce  
Press  
. The screen displays  
ELG/RDC:100%  
ONLINE  
SELECT  
ONLINE  
& SET  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O P Y O P E R A T I O N S  
107  
Press  
or  
to choose an enlargement or reduction ratio.  
3
You can reduce to 93%, 87%, 75%, or 50% of the original size  
OR—  
You can enlarge to 120%, 125%, 150%, or 200%  
OR—  
Set  
You can select MANUAL and press  
, then use the dial pad to enter  
an enlargement or reduction ratio between 50% and 200%. For  
5
3
example, press  
,
to enter 53%.  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
4
5
6
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
or  
.
Using the dial pad, enter the number of copies  
OR—  
Keep the default (01).  
Set  
Press  
.
7
8
Mono Copy  
If you pressed  
(Only for multiple copies)  
in Step 5, you can select SORT by pressing  
.
Set  
Press  
.
9
When selecting Fixed Reduction, you need to know the size of the recording  
paper as registered in Function 1-2-6.  
If you make a copy the same size as the original document size, you should  
choose a reduction of 93%. (For example, if you make a copy from letter to  
letter, you should choose a reduction of 93%.)  
Selecting the Ratios of Fixed Reduction  
Original Document  
the size of…  
Paper  
size is…  
Recommmended  
reduction ratio is…  
LETTER DOCUMENT  
LETTER  
LEGAL  
LETTER  
LETTER  
LEGAL  
93%  
100%  
87%  
75%  
93%  
A4 DOCUMENT  
LEGAL DOCUMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
108  
Copy Quality Temporary Settings  
You can quickly improve the copy quality by using the Copy Quality Paper  
Type and Brightness keys. These settings are temporary, and the MFC  
returns to its default settings when you finish copying. You might want to  
try different combinations of settings to see which best suits your needs.  
Using the Copy Quality Key  
The Copy Quality key changes the settings for quality (NORMAL, HIGH, or  
DRAFT) and type of original document (STANDARD or PHOTO). Select  
DRAFT when you want a color copy at the fastest speed. NORMAL is a  
higher quality than DRAFT and prints faster than HIGH. HIGH quality is the  
highest resolution and slowest to print. For type of original, choose PHOTO  
only for photographs. If line art, graphs, or text are included, choose  
Mono Copy  
STANDARD. You can make multiple copies, and if you use  
sort them.  
you can  
Place the document to be copied in the feeder.  
1
2
Copy Quality  
Press  
. The screen displays the default setting, for example:  
QUALITY:HIGH  
ONLINE  
SELECT  
ONLINE  
& SET  
Press  
or  
to select copy quality resolution.  
3
4
QUALITY:NORMAL  
QUALITY:HIGH  
QUALITY:DRAFT  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
a setting for the original, for example:  
. The screen displays  
ORIGINAL:STD  
ONLINE  
SELECT  
ONLINE  
& SET  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O P Y O P E R A T I O N S  
109  
Press  
or  
to select the kind of image you’re copying.  
5
6
ORIGINAL:STD  
(text, line art, graphs, or any  
combination including photographs)  
ORIGINAL:PHOTO (photographs only)  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
.
Using the Paper Type Key  
If you use premium paper, the copy quality is improved. You can choose  
PLAIN PAPER, INK JET PAPER, GLOSSY PAPER, and  
TRANSPARENCY. For best results, we recommend using Brother Special  
paper.  
Insert the document face down in the feeder.  
1
2
Paper Type  
Press  
. The screen displays the default setting, for example:  
PAPER:PLAIN  
ONLINE  
SELECT  
ONLINE  
& SET  
Press  
or  
to select a paper type.  
3
PAPER:PLAIN  
PAPER:INK JET  
PAPER:GLOSSY  
PAPER:TRNSPRNCY  
If you are using Brother coated paper for 360 dpi (BP36CL) or 720 dpi  
(BP72CL) or if you are using non-Brother ink jet paper, select INK JET.  
Set  
Press  
. If you did not select INK JET, skip to Step 6.  
or to select 360DPI  
4
5
If you selected INK JET, press  
(Brother 360 x 360), 720DPI (Brother 720 x 720) or OTHER  
(non-Brother ink jet) paper type.  
Set  
Press  
.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
110  
Using the Brightness Key  
You can choose brightness setting before making a copy.  
Insert the document face down in the feeder.  
1
2
3
Brightness  
Press  
.
Press  
to make a darker copy.  
OR—  
press  
to make a lighter copy.  
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays your setting.  
4
Copy Quality – Default Settings  
Changing Default Settings  
Function  
3
Press  
,
to change default settings for Copy mode. These settings  
Function  
will remain until you change them again by pressing  
. Adjust the  
colors using the Color Adjustment, Brightness, and Contrast settings.  
By pressing a number, you can adjust copy settings as shown in the  
following chart. Press  
or  
to move through the selections for each  
Set  
Stop  
setting. Press  
to save your selection. Press  
to exit—OR—Press  
to select the next setting you want to change.  
FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS  
1
2
3
4
Paper Type  
Quality  
Original Type  
Color Adjust  
: PLAIN PAPER  
: HIGH  
: STANDARD  
: R:–  
+
+
: G:–  
: B:–  
+
5
6
7
Brightness  
Contrast  
One Color  
: –  
: –  
+
+
: OFF = Black  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O P Y O P E R A T I O N S  
111  
Press Function and  
.
3
1.PAPER TYPE  
PAPER:PLAIN  
PAPER:INK JET  
PAPER:GLOSSY  
PAPER:TRNSPRNCY  
INK JET:360DPI  
INK JET:720DPI  
INK JET:OTHER  
QUALITY:NORMAL  
QUALITY:HIGH  
2.QUALITY  
QUALITY:DRAFT  
ORIGINAL:STD  
3.ORIGINAL TYPE  
4.COLOR ADJUST  
ORIGINAL:PHOTO  
COLOR:RED  
R: –  
+
+
+
COLOR:GREEN  
COLOR:BLUE  
G: –  
B: –  
+
+
5.BRIGHTNESS  
6.CONTRAST  
7.ONE COLOR  
COLOR:OFF  
COLOR:RED  
COLOR:GREEN  
COLOR:BLUE  
COLOR:CYAN  
COLOR:MAGENTA  
COLOR:YELLOW  
is default  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
112  
Select Paper Type  
Function  
3
1
Press  
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
1.PAPER TYPE  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
2
3
or  
to select your paper setting.  
PAPER:PLAIN  
PAPER:INK JET  
PAPER:GLOSSY  
PAPER:TRNSPRNCY  
when the screen displays your selection.  
Set  
Press  
4
If you use Brother coated paper for 360 dpi (BP36CL) or 720 dpi  
(BP72CL), select INK JET, then select 360DPI or 720DPI. If you use  
non-Brother ink jet paper, select INK JET, then select OTHER. If you did  
not select INK JET, skip to step 7. (For information on ordering Brother  
paper, see p. ii.)  
Press  
Press  
Press  
or  
to select 360DPI, 720DPI, or OTHER.  
5
6
7
Set  
.
Stop  
to exit.  
The MFC ejects paper with printed surfaces face up into the paper tray at  
the front of the MFC. When you use transparencies, remove each sheet  
immediately, to prevent a paper jam or curled sheets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O P Y O P E R A T I O N S  
113  
Select Copy Quality  
Function  
3
2
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
Press  
or  
to select copy quality.  
QUALITY:NORMAL  
QUALITY:HIGH  
QUALITY:DRAFT  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
3
4
Stop  
This feature is available only for color copying.  
Select Type of Original  
Function  
3
3
Press  
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
3.ORIGINAL TYPE  
Press  
or  
to select your original type.  
2
ORIGINAL:STD  
ORIGINAL:PHOTO  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
3
4
Stop  
This feature is available only for color copying.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
114  
Color Adjustment  
Function  
3
4
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
3
or  
to select RED, GREEN, or BLUE.  
Set  
.
Light  
Dark  
R: –  
+
G: –  
B: –  
+
+
Press  
Press  
or  
to adjust the degree of color.  
4
5
6
Set  
.
Return to Step 2 to select the next color —OR—  
Press  
Stop  
to exit.  
Copy Brightness  
You can choose brightness setting before making a copy.  
Function  
3
5
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
Press  
to make a darker copy  
OR—  
Press  
to make a lighter copy.  
when the screen displays your setting.  
to exit.  
Set  
Press  
3
4
Stop  
Press  
Copy Contrast  
You can choose the contrast setting for a copy. Greater contrast can help an  
image look sharper and more vivid. This feature is available only for color  
copying.  
Function  
3
6
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
Press  
to decrease contrast  
OR—  
Press  
to increase contrast.  
Set  
When the screen displays your setting, press  
.
3
4
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O P Y O P E R A T I O N S  
115  
Selecting a Single Color (One Color)  
For black and white originals, you can select a single color, instead of  
Mono Copy  
black, as the default to be used when you press  
for Black.  
. OFF is the setting  
Function  
3
7
Press  
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
or  
to select a copy color:  
COLOR:OFF  
COLOR:RED  
COLOR:GREEN  
COLOR:BLUE  
COLOR:CYAN  
COLOR:MAGENTA  
COLOR:YELLOW  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
.
3
4
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
116  
Memory Full Message  
If the memory becomes full while you’re making copies, the screen displays  
MEMORY FULL P.01  
ONLINE  
followed by  
COPY TO COPY  
ONLINE  
STOP TO ABORT  
ONLINE  
Stop  
If you were scanning the first page of your document, press  
to cancel  
the job and then restart it to make a single copy. If you were scanning a  
Copy  
subsequent page, press  
to print the pages already scanned—OR—  
Stop  
Press  
to cancel.  
You’ll need to clear some fax or voice messages before you can continue.  
To gain extra memory, you can erase any of the following types of  
messages:  
• To erase incoming messages (ICMs) and memos (7160C), see pp. 96-97.  
• To turn off Fax Storage (7150C), see p.83.  
• To print fax message stored in memory (7160C), see pp. 95-96.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O P Y O P E R A T I O N S  
117  
Legal Limitations  
Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in  
either criminal or civil liability. This memorandum is intended to be a  
guide rather than a complete listing of every possible prohibition. In case  
of doubt, we suggest that you check with counsel as to any particular  
questionable documents.  
The following documents issued by the United States/Canadian  
Government or any of its Agencies may not be copied:  
• Paper money  
• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness  
• Certificates of Deposit  
• Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
• Selective Service or draft papers  
• Passports  
• United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
• Food Stamps  
• Immigration Papers  
• Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies  
• Identifying badges or insignias  
Copyrighted works cannot be copied; however, sections of a copyrighted  
work can be copied for “fair use.” Multiple copies would indicate improper  
use.  
Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.  
Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles may not be copied under  
certain state/provincial laws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T H I R T E E N  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
C H A P T E R F O U R T E E N  
Walk-Up  
Video Printing  
14  
Walk-Up Video Printing lets you use your MFC, connected to your  
camcorder, digital camera, video game, or VCR, to view a video on the  
attached equipment. The video signal and the output you create are NTSC  
(National Television System Committee). This is not compatible with any  
other standard.  
Getting Started  
With no documents in the feeder, plug the cable from you video camera’s  
Video Out jack into the MFC’s RCA pin jack. Play the video.  
Some camcorders, digital cameras, video games or VCRs do not correctly  
conform with NTSC standards. Then you would not be able to capture  
video signals.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R T E E N  
120  
Auto Switch  
Whenever you connect video equipment to the MFC and turn the video signal  
Paper Type  
Copy Quality  
on, the MFC  
and  
keys automatically switch to video  
printing mode  
and the screen displays  
VIDEO:PRESS COPY  
CAPTURE READY  
As soon as you turn off the video equipment or disconnect it, the MFC  
Paper Type  
Copy Quality  
returns to normal copy mode for  
and  
.
The Auto Switch will not work if you have too much in memory.  
ColorVideo Printing  
With no documents in the feeder, plug the cable from your video  
camera’s Video Out jack into the MFC’s RCA pin jack.  
1
Play the video. When the MFC begins receiving the video signals, the  
MFC screen displays  
2
VIDEO:PRESS COPY  
CAPTURE READY  
Color Copy  
Press  
when you see the picture you want to capture and print.  
3
The MFC begins printing, and beeps when printing is complete.  
Color Copy  
If the MFC is not receiving video signals,  
will not work. However, if  
there is a document in the feeder, the MFC will print a color copy of the  
document.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W A L K - U P V I D E O P R I N T I N G  
121  
Black &WhiteVideo Printing  
For Black and white video printing, follow the steps for Color Video  
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Printing, using  
instead of  
.
Video Print Quality Temporary  
Settings  
You can quickly improve the copy quality of video printouts by using the  
Copy Quality, Paper Type and Brightness keys. These settings are  
temporary, and the MFC returns to its default settings when you finish  
printing. You might want to try different combinations of settings to see  
which best suits your needs.  
Using the Copy Quality Key  
Your MFC allows you to customize the quality of your video copies by  
letting you select the video print quality and paper type. You might want to  
try different combinations of settings to see which best suits your needs.  
The settings are temporary.  
Make sure there is no document in the feeder. Plug the cable from  
your video camera’s Out jack into the MFC’s RCA pin jack.  
1
Copy Quality  
Press  
. The screen displays the current setting, for example:  
2
QUALITY:NORMAL  
ONLINE  
Use  
or  
to select copy quality.  
3
QUALITY:NORMAL  
QUALITY:HIGH  
If there is too much in memory, the print quality will change.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R T E E N  
122  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
a video type setting, for example:  
. The screen displays  
4
VIDEO:MOVING  
ONLINE  
Press  
or  
to select the video type.  
5
6
VIDEO:MOVING  
VIDEO:STILL  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
The screen displays  
.
PRESS COPY KEY  
ONLINE  
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Press  
or  
.
7
The screen shows  
PRINTING  
ONLINE  
Using the Paper Type Key  
If you use premium paper, video print quality is improved.  
With no documents in the feeder, plug the cable from your video  
camera’s Out jack into the MFC’s RCA pin jack.  
1
Paper Type  
Press  
. The screen displays the current setting, for example:  
2
PAPER:PLAIN  
ONLINE  
SELECT  
ONLINE  
& SET  
Press  
or  
to select paper type.  
3
PAPER:PLAIN  
PAPER:INK JET  
PAPER:GLOSSY  
PAPER:TRNSPRNCY  
If you are using Brother coated paper for 360 dpi (BP36CL) or 720 dpi  
(BP72CL), select INK JET, then select 360DPI or 720DPI. If you are  
using non-Brother ink jet paper, select OTHER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W A L K - U P V I D E O P R I N T I N G  
123  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
The screen displays  
.
4
5
PRESS COPY KEY  
ONLINE  
Mono Copy  
Color Copy  
Press  
or  
.
The screen shows  
PRINTING  
ONLINE  
Using the Brightness Key  
You can increase or decrease the brightness setting before making a video  
copy.  
With no documents in the feeder, plug the cable from your video  
camera’s Out jack into the MFC’s RCA pin jack.  
1
Brightness  
Press  
.
2
3
Press  
to make a darker copy.  
OR—  
Press  
to make a lighter copy.  
Set  
Press  
when the screen displays your setting.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R T E E N  
124  
Changing Default Settings  
Function  
4
Press  
and  
to change default settings for video printing.  
DEFAULT SETTINGS  
1. Paper Type  
2. Quality  
PLAIN PAPER  
HIGH  
3. Video Type  
4. Print Size  
5. Color Ajust  
MOVING  
5.75" x 4.25"  
: R:–  
: G:–  
: B:–  
+
+
+
6. Brightness  
: –  
+
Function  
4
By pressing  
,
and a number, you can adjust video printing  
settings as shown in the following chart. Press  
or  
to move through  
Set  
the selection for each setting. Press  
to save your selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W A L K - U P V I D E O P R I N T I N G  
125  
Press Function and  
.
4
1.PAPER TYPE  
PAPER:PLAIN  
PAPER:INK JET  
INK JET:360DPI  
INK JET:720DPI  
INK JET:OTHER  
PAPER:GLOSSY  
PAPER:TRNSPRNCY  
QUALITY:NORMAL  
QUALITY:HIGH  
2.QUALITY  
VIDEO:MOVING  
VIDEO:STILL  
3.VIDEO TYPE  
4.PRINT SIZE  
SIZE:5.75"X4.25"  
SIZE:4"X3"  
SIZE:4"X3"X6  
COLOR:RED  
R: –  
+
+
+
5.COLOR ADJUST  
6.BRIGHTNESS  
COLOR:GREEN  
COLOR:BLUE  
G: –  
B: –  
+
is default  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R T E E N  
126  
Setting Paper Type  
Function  
4
1
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
The screen displays  
PAPER:PLAIN  
PAPER:INK JET  
PAPER:GLOSSY  
PAPER:TRNSPRNCY  
Press  
or  
to select a paper type.  
3
If you are using Brother coated paper for 360 dpi (BP36CL) or 720 dpi  
(BP72CL), select INK JET, then select 360DPI or 720DPI (in Step 4).  
If you are using non-Brother ink jet paper, select OTHER (in Step 4).  
Set  
When the screen displays your selection, press  
.
4
5
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Setting Video Printing Quality  
Function  
4
2
Press  
,
,
.
1
The screen displays 2. QUALITY.  
Press  
or  
to select a quality.  
2
QUALITY:NORMAL  
QUALITY:HIGH  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
3
4
Stop  
Setting Video Type  
Before you turn on the video signal, you must set the MFC to receive either  
a moving or a still image. You can watch the video play on the video camera  
Copy  
and press  
when you see the frame you want to print.  
Function  
4
3
Press  
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
3.VIDEO TYPE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W A L K - U P V I D E O P R I N T I N G  
127  
Press  
or  
to select video type.  
2
VIDEO:STILL  
VIDEO:MOVING  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
to exit.  
3
4
Stop  
Clear  
You can press  
in steps 2 and 3 return to the previous step.  
If you don’t have enough memory to process the selected video image, the  
print quality may be poor even for a still frame.  
Setting Print Size  
Function  
4
4
Press  
,
,
.
1
2
Press  
or  
to select print size:  
SIZE: 5.75" X 4.25"  
SIZE: 4" X 3"  
SIZE: 4" X 3" X 6  
Set  
Press  
Press  
when the screen displays your selection.  
3
4
Stop  
to exit.  
Printed Position  
5.75" x 4.25"  
4" x 3"  
4" x 3" x 6  
3"  
4.25"  
4"  
5.75"  
3"  
4"  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F O U R T E E N  
128  
Video Printing Color Adjustment  
Function  
4
Press  
Press  
Press  
,
,
5
.
1
2
3
or  
to select RED, GREEN, or BLUE.  
Set  
.
Light  
Dark  
R: –  
+
G: –  
B: –  
+
+
Press  
Press  
or  
to adjust the degree of color.  
4
5
6
Set  
.
Return to Step 2 to select the next color —OR—  
Press  
Stop  
to exit.  
Video Printing Brightness  
You can increase or decrease the brightness setting before making a copy.  
Function  
4
Press  
,
,
6
.
1
2
Press  
to make a darker copy.  
OR—  
Press  
to make a lighter copy.  
when the screen displays your setting.  
to exit.  
Set  
Press  
3
4
Stop  
Press  
Video Capture to PC  
Please see Video Capture from your PC, pp. 173–176 or the Multi-Function  
Link Pro On-Line Documentation (on CD-ROM 1) for complete  
instructions on using your MFC and computer for video frame capture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
C H A P T E R F I F T E E N  
Setting Up  
the MFC and  
15  
Computer to  
Work Together  
BeforeYou Install Multi-Function  
Link Pro Software  
Your MFC and computer can work together only if you install the Brother  
Multi-Function Link Pro Software. Mult-Function Link Pro turns your  
machine into a multi-function center, by using it as a color printer and a  
color scanner and enabling PC faxing from Windows® applications in your  
computer. In addition, the included 3D FaxSpeed software enables you to  
fax color images and files. Multi-Function Link Pro does all this without  
taking over your personal computer. Multi-Function Link Pro operations  
run in the background of your PC memory, keeping your personal computer  
free for other tasks.  
WARNING  
It is important that you hook up your MFC to your computer before you  
install the software.  
Before you install the Multi-Function Link Pro,  
you must read the README.WRI file in the  
root directory of the CD-ROM (or Floppy  
Disks) for important installation and  
troubleshooting information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I F T E E N  
130  
If You Don’t Have a CD-ROM Drive  
All software is supplied on CD-ROM. If you need a Floppy Diskette version  
(only Multi-Function Link Pro and Visioneer PaperPort LE are available on  
Floppy Disks, item numbers DSK7131 (for Windows® 3.1 or 3.11) and  
DSK7195 (for Windows® 95 or 98). If you are using Windows NT®  
Workstation Version 4.0, the software is not available on Floppy Diskette.).  
You must tell the Brother Representative the version of Windows® that you  
are using and your MFC model number. To order, call Brother at 1-888-879-  
3232 (USA), 1-800-668-2768 (from within Canada) or 1-514-685-6464  
(from within Montreal).  
Computer Requirements  
The following are the minimum computer requirements you need to set up  
and operate the MFC as a printer. Use only a shielded interface cable that is  
IEEE-1284 compliant, and that is less than 6.5 feet (2 meters) long.  
CPU  
Pentium 75 or Higher  
RAM  
8MB or greater for Windows® 3.1 or 3.11  
8MB or greater for Windows® 95 or 98  
(16MB recommended)  
16MB or greater for Windows NT® Workstation  
Version 4.0 (32MB recommended)  
Hard Disk Drive  
50MB  
CD-ROM 1  
250MB CD-ROM 1 & 2  
Operating System Windows® 3.1, 3.11, 95, 98 or NT® Workstation Version 4.0,  
DOS environment compatible with your Windows®  
version  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T T I N G U P T H E M F C A N D  
C O M P U T E R T O W O R K T O G E T H E R  
131  
Connecting the MFC to the Computer  
When you connect the MFC to your computer, you must use the included  
Brother bi-directional IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable.  
Unplug the MFC power cord from the electrical outlet before  
1
connecting the parallel interface cable.  
Make sure the computer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical  
2
power before you connect the interface cable.  
Connect the parallel interface cable to the parallel interface port of the  
3
MFC and secure the wire clips.  
Connect the interface cable to the printer port of the computer and  
4
secure with the two screws.  
For the location of your computer’s parallel printer port, see the User’s  
Guide for your computer.  
Before plugging in the electrical cord of the MFC, plug in your  
5
computer and turn it on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I F T E E N  
132  
Installing Multi-Function Link Pro  
Software (CD-ROM 1)  
IMPORTANT  
To install the software using Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0,  
you must be logged on as the Administrator. After Multi-Function Link  
Pro is installed, restart Windows NT® a second time and again log in as  
the Administrator, so you can complete the Remote Setup application.  
After you have completed Remote Setup, log in using your normal User  
name.  
Overview of Basic Steps  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
1
Enter the command for your version of Windows®, if needed.  
See  
Installing the  
2
Brother Software  
p. 134  
Select the software option that suits your needs.  
Follow the installation instructions.  
3
4
Choosing the Software to Install  
Install Multi-Function Link Pro Software  
The complete set of software will be installed: Multi-Function Link Pro,  
Visioneer PaperPort™ LE viewer, and Brother scanner driver, printer  
drivers and True Type Compatible fonts, install:  
Install Multi-Function Link Pro  
Install NetCentric™ FaxStorm  
If you want to be able to do Internet faxing from your computer anytime,  
anywhere without using your MFC, install:  
NetCentric™ FaxStorm  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T T I N G U P T H E M F C A N D  
C O M P U T E R T O W O R K T O G E T H E R  
133  
Install Automatic E-Mail Printing  
If you want your e-mail messages automatically to be retrieved from your  
POP3 server and printed on the MFC, install:  
Automatic E-Mail Printing  
Install 3D FaxSpeed  
If you want to be able to send color files by fax, install:  
3D FaxSpeed  
Install MFC 7100 Series Drivers Only  
If you only want to print and scan, you can install only the Brother MFC  
drivers, install:  
Brother MFC 7100 Series Drivers  
Other Options  
View On-Line Documentation  
All instructions are in the On-Line Documentation and Help files on  
CD-ROM 1.  
View Product Support Information  
This is a page of all Brother support numbers.  
Brother Web Link  
Brother Web Link visits the Internet Brother Home Page on the World Wide  
Web. You can find more information about Brother products, from product  
specification sheets to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s). You must have  
service with an Internet service provider.  
Exit  
Click Exit to exit the CD-ROM window, or click Return to return to the  
previous window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I F T E E N  
134  
Installing the Brother Software  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
1
2
Enter the command for your version of Windows®, if needed:  
After you insert the Brother CD-ROM, you must type the appropriate  
command for your version of Windows®:  
If you are using Windows® 3.1 or 3.11, from the Program Manager,  
click File, then Run. Then type x:\SETUP.EXE. (“x” is the drive  
letter for your CD-ROM drive.) This will start the Software  
Installation program.  
If you are using Windows® 95, 98 or Windows NT® Workstation  
Version 4.0, the Software Installation program appears automatically  
when you insert the Brother CD-ROM.  
For Windows® 95, 98 and Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0, you can  
also click on Start at the Desktop, select Run and then enter  
x:\SETUP.EXE.  
The Brother LOGO will be displayed on the screen.  
If you are using Windows NT® 3.51 or earlier, the following error message  
will appear on the screen: You are running Windows NT® 3.51 or earlier.  
Brother MFL Pro does not support this version of Windows NT®. YOU  
MUST UPGRADE TO WINDOWS NT 4.0 AND REINSTALL MFL Pro!!  
If you are using Windows NT® Workstation 4.0 and you are not logged-in as  
the Administrator, an error message will appear explaining the problem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T T I N G U P T H E M F C A N D  
C O M P U T E R T O W O R K T O G E T H E R  
135  
A window will appear listing the options:  
For each application you install, click on its name in the Software  
Installation window and follow the instructions on the screen. The last step  
will be to restart Windows® and access the Software Installation window  
again to install the next application.  
Click on “Install Multi-Function Link Pro Software” and follow the  
3
prompts on the screen.  
If you are using Windows® 95 or 98, after you install the Multi-Function  
Link Pro Software you may see “New Hardware Found Brother MFC  
XXXX” during startup. You can select “Do not install a driver (Windows®  
will not prompt you again).” and click OK, so Windows® will not display  
this dialog box again.  
If you see the “Update Device Driver Wizard” during startup, follow the  
instructions from the installer, then click Next. Click Finish when it  
appears on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I F T E E N  
136  
After you finish installing the software, you can click on “On-Line  
4
Documentation” to access on-line documentation for Multi-Function  
Link Pro and Visioneer PaperPort LE. The On-Line Documentation  
window will appear:  
In the On-Line Documentation window, click on “Install Acrobat  
5
Reader” and follow the prompts on the screen. You must install Acrobat  
Reader before you can view on-line documentation. You can print the  
On-Line Documentation by selecting Print from the File pull-down  
menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T T I N G U P T H E M F C A N D  
C O M P U T E R T O W O R K T O G E T H E R  
137  
Helpful Hints for Windows® 3.1, 3.11, 95 and 98  
The installer automatically updates your SYSTEM.INI Windows® file by  
adding DEVICE=bi-di.386 under the [386Enh] section. If any  
bi-directional parallel communications device driver has previously been  
installed, it will be deactivated by this new driver. If you want to use the  
driver that was previously installed, you should first install this driver,  
then reinstall your previous driver. However, reinstalling the previous  
driver will make the MFC driver inactive.  
The installer makes the installed printer driver the Windows® default.  
The installer automatically sets the printer port to the parallel interface,  
LPT1 (for Windows® 3.1 or 3.11) and BRMFC (for Windows® 95 or 98)  
and BMFC (for Windows NT® Workstation 4.0).  
During this installation, changes have been made to the SYSTEM.INI  
file. It is necessary to restart Windows® so the changes become  
effective and the installed bi-directional parallel communications  
device driver can take effect.  
IMPORTANT  
Please see the README.WRI file in the root directory of the CD-ROM (or  
diskette) for last minute important installation and troubleshooting  
information.  
Receiving Messages into the PC  
See  
Connecting the  
MFC to the  
Computer  
To receive faxes into your PC through the MFC:  
Make sure the MFC is connected to the PC. The PC and the  
1
Multi-Function Link Pro Main Menu must be running at all times.  
p. 131  
Load the Multi-Function Link Pro software into you PC.  
2
See  
Installing  
Multi-Function  
Link Pro  
Software  
(CD-ROM 1)  
p. 132  
On your PC in the Multi-Function Link Pro software:  
3
A
Select Setup from the Preferences... pull-down menu in the Main  
Menu.  
B
C
Under Answer Mode select Fax only.  
Click the OK button.  
Check that the Multi-Function Link Pro mode is ON (see below).  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R F I F T E E N  
138  
Multi-Function Link Pro Mode  
See  
On-Line  
Documentation  
for  
Multi-Function  
Link Pro  
on the Brother  
CD-ROM  
and  
You can switch Multi-Function Link Pro Mode on and off as needed. If you  
want your fax messages to go directly into your PC, make sure the MF Link  
setting is ON. If you want faxes to print on your MFC when they arrive, you  
can switch MF Link mode to OFF.  
Function  
1
2
8
Press  
Press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
or  
to select ON (or OFF).  
Using the  
Multi-Function  
Link Pro  
Set  
Press  
Press  
.
3
4
Stop  
to exit.  
Software  
Chapter 18  
p. 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
C H A P T E R S I X T E E N  
Using MFC  
as Printer  
16  
Features  
The Multi-Function Center offers you many features you’ll find in a high  
quality ink jet printer.  
Fast Printing Speed—Using Draft mode, you can print 4 pages per minute  
in full color.  
Brilliant 4-Color Output at 360 dpi—Printing at 360 dpi resolution on  
special coated paper or glossy paper gives you normal resolution output.  
Brilliant 4-Color Output at 720 dpi—Printing at 720 dpi resolution on  
special coated paper or glossy paper gives you high resolution output.  
Brilliant 4-Color Output at 1440 dpi—Printing at 1440 dpi resolution  
on special coated paper or glossy paper gives you highest resolution output.  
Low Running Cost—Whenever you run out of a particular color ink,  
you’ll replace only the cartridge that’s empty.  
Suitable UsesYou can print from both Windows and DOS operating  
systems. When you print from DOS, the MFC uses ESC/P2.  
Bi-directional Parallel Interface—The parallel interface allows  
bi-directional (IEEE 1284 compliant) communication with your computer.  
This interface allows the MFC to communicate useful information, such as  
the amount of memory installed and other printing setup conditions, as the  
supplied Windows 3.1, 3.11, 95, 98 or NT® Workstation Version 4.0 drivers  
support bi-directional mode. Printer status is also reported.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X T E E N  
140  
Straight Paper Path—The MFC can use various types of paper: plain  
paper, coated paper, glossy paper, transparencies, and envelopes. Using the  
appropriate paper reduces the occurrence of paper jams. For complete  
information about what kinds of paper to use with the MFC, please read  
Chapter 3 in this manual.  
Printer Driver  
You can change the following printer settings when you print from your  
computer:  
Quality - Speed/Media Setting  
Color Correction Control  
Color Adjustment  
Brightness/Contrast Adjustment/Halftone Selection  
Start Maintenance Program  
(See Chapter 17, PC Printing.)  
Choosing the Right Kind of Paper  
To achieve high quality printing using your MFC, it’s very important to  
select the right kind of paper. Be sure to read “About Brother Paper” on  
p. 25 of Chapter 3 in this manual before selecting and purchasing paper for  
the MFC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G M F C A S P R I N T E R  
141  
Multi-purpose Sheet Feeder  
The multi-purpose sheet feeder can feed plain paper, coated paper, glossy  
paper, transparancies, envelopes, and organizer paper (K, L). When the MFC  
receives data from your computer, it begins the print process by loading paper  
from the multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
Select the print command from your PC.  
1
2
Your PC sends a print command and data to the MFC. The screen  
displays the date and time, and RECEIVING DATA.  
If there are more pages, the MFC begins to print the next page  
automatically.  
3
When the MFC finishes printing all data, it returns to online status.  
4
You can select paper source, paper size, and orientation in your application  
software. If your application software does not support your custom paper  
size, select the next larger paper size. Then adjust the print area by  
changing the right and left margins in your application software.  
Loading Paper  
You can use plain paper, coated paper, transparencies, glossy paper,  
envelopes and organizer (K, L) in the multi-purpose sheet feeder. (See  
Chapter 3 for more information about paper types.)  
Open the top cover of the MFC. Turn the purple paper thickness  
adjustment lever down. When you want to print on regular paper, keep  
the lever up. When you want to use thick paper, press the lever down.  
Then, close the top cover.  
1
(For regular paper)  
(For thick paper)  
Paper  
Ajustment  
Lever  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X T E E N  
142  
Open the feeder. Remove any paper in the feeder, and load the new  
paper. Fan the stack of paper before loading.  
2
3
Load the paper stack with the printing (coated) side facing up. Adjust  
the paper guide. Make sure the paper is stacked below the arrow. You  
can load up to approximately 200 sheets of 20 lb (75g/m2). plain paper.  
Close the feeder cover.  
4
Manual Feed Slot  
You can use only one sheet at a time in the Manual Feed Slot. Paper loaded  
in the Manual Feed Slot is printed first, even when there is paper in the  
multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
If you want to print more than one page using the Manual Feed Slot, on  
your PC, in the printer driver Properties Paper tab, select “manual feed”.  
Load one sheet of paper in the Manual Feed Slot, holding it with both  
hands. Align the paper in the center of the feeder.  
1
Gently push the paper all the way down in the slot.  
2
3
Adjust the guides to make sure the paper is straight and centered to  
prevent a paper jam or misfeed.  
If you forget to insert paper in the manual feed slot, the MFC will print from  
the cassette.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G M F C A S P R I N T E R  
143  
Setup for Envelopes  
You can use the manual feed slot to print one envelope at a time.  
See  
The Paper Tab  
p. 149  
Select the paper size setting in the printer driver Properties window.  
Open the top cover.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press the purple paper thickness adjustment lever down.  
Close the top cover.  
Insert an envelope into the manual feed slot sideways, with the print  
side face up.  
From your PC application, tell the MFC to begin printing. On  
completion, you can place another envelope in the manual feed slot.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X T E E N  
144  
Simultaneous Printing/Fax  
Your MFC can print data from your computer while sending or receiving a  
fax, or while scanning information into the computer. However, when the  
MFC is copying or receiving a fax on paper, it pauses the PC printing  
operation, and resumes when copying or fax receiving is complete. Fax  
sending will continue during PC printing.  
Printer Operation Keys  
Priority
On/OffLine Key  
This key toggles the MFC’s OnLine and OffLine print status, which appears  
on the display. If you press this key while printing, the MFC immediately  
On/Off Line  
stops printing and goes offline. Press  
again to resume printing.  
Reset Key  
If the screen displays REMAINED DATA, you can clear data remaining in  
On/Off Line  
Reset  
the printer memory by pressing  
, then pressing  
.
Priority Key  
Priority  
When you press  
, the MFC enters printer mode, and will not print  
faxes on paper. Instead, faxes are stored in the memory until you press  
Priority  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G M F C A S P R I N T E R  
145  
Ink Management Key  
Ink Management  
When you press  
, the screen displays  
See  
How to  
Improve  
1.CLEANING  
Print Quality  
pp. 236–238  
2.REPLACE INK  
If you are having trouble with one of the ink colors, you may need to clean the  
print head, page 236.  
If you got an error message NEAR EMPTY or INK EMPTY, you will need  
to replace the ink cartridge for the appropriate color. (See pages 243-246 in  
Chapter 25, Troubleshooting and Maintenance.)  
Turning Off Bi-directional Printing  
You can further improve print quality by turning off bi-directional printing  
and setting the MFC to print in one direction only. However, this will  
reduce print speed by one half.  
Function  
2
3
Press  
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
3.BI-DIR PRINT  
2
1
Press  
to select OFF (or  
to select ON).  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S I X T E E N  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
PC Printing  
17  
Printer Emulation  
If you are printing from the Windows® environment, it is best to choose the  
GDI Brother MFC-7100 Series printer driver. Other emulations may  
reduce performance. If you need to print from DOS, the MFC 7150C and  
MFC 7160C will emulate EPSON LQ-510, LQ-850 and LQ-2550.  
Using the Maintenance Utility  
Program for Printing from DOS  
Before printing from DOS applications, you must use this DOS utility and  
select the paper size. You can make the following selections through the  
utility program.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning  
Black  
Yellow  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
148  
Data 1  
Quality  
Page Length  
Character Set  
Auto LF  
Text Print Direction  
Condensed  
Data 2  
Character Pitch  
LF Pitch  
Auto CR  
Zero Font  
Paper Size  
Black Emphasis  
Code Page  
Installing the Brother MFC-7100 Series DOS Tools  
Use these tools only in the DOS environment. When you print in DOS  
mode, select an EPSON ESC/P (LQ-510, LQ-850, LQ-2550) compatible  
emulation driver in your application.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM labeled “CD-ROM 1” into your CD-ROM  
drive.  
1
2
Type CD x:\BY-II\WIN3X\MFLPRO\FULL\DISK5\DOSTOOL  
Substitute the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive for “X”.  
(“3X” is Windows® 3.1 or 3.11.)  
Type DOSETUP, then press Enter. The main screen appears on your  
computer.  
3
4
Make your selection from the list above.  
Before printing, you must set the paper size in this utility and in your  
DOS application.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P C P R I N T I N G  
149  
Using the Brother MFC-7100 Series  
Printer Driver  
The Brother MFC-7100 Series printer driver enables you to change settings  
and override defaults as you change your paper, document type, and colors  
for printing. In the Brother MFC-7100 Series on BRMFC: Properties dialog  
box there are three tabs: Paper, Quality/Color, and Control/Maintenance, so  
you can change print properties as needed.  
The PaperTab  
The paper tab screen allows you to set up the Paper Size, Paper Source,  
Orientation, Scaling, and Copies.  
To access the Brother printer driver, select Print from the File menu. In the  
Print dialog box, select Brother MFC-7100 Series from the Name drop  
down list. Click the Properties button. The Brother MFC-7100 Series on  
BRMFC: Properties dialog box will appear:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
150  
Select the Apply button to apply your selected settings.  
To return to the default settings, click the Default button, then click the  
Apply button.  
Paper Size  
You can select the size of paper and envelopes and also define other sizes of  
paper.  
Letter (US)  
8 1/2 x 11 inches (215.9 x 279.4 mm)  
8 1/2 x 14 inches (215.9 x 355.6 mm)  
7 1/4 x 10 1/2 inches (184.2 x 266.7 mm)  
5.8 x 8.3 inches (148 x 210 mm)  
Legal (US)  
Executive (US)  
A5 (International)  
Envelopes  
B5 (International envelope)  
C5 (International envelope)  
COM-10  
6.9 x 9.8 inches (176 x 250 mm)  
6.4 x 9 inches (162 x 229 mm)  
4 1/8 x 9 1/2 inches (104.8 x 241 mm)  
4.3 x 8.7 inches (110 x 220 mm)  
3 7/8 x 7 1/2 inches (98.4 x 190.5 mm)  
2 3/4 x 5 inches (69.8 x 127 mm)  
3 3/4 x 6 3/4 inches (95.3 x 171.5 mm)  
5 1/2 x 8 1/2 inches (139.7 x 215.9 mm)  
DL (International envelope)  
Monarch (US envelope)  
Organizer J  
Organizer K  
Organizer L  
User Defined Paper Size  
The printer can handle any paper size within the following range.  
Minimum 2.75 x 5 inches (69.8 x 127 mm)  
Maximum 8.5 x 14.02 inches (215.9 x 356 mm)  
In this option, you can specify a custom-sized paper and save it by  
following this procedure:  
Measure the paper size you want to use.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select User Defined... in the paper size option.  
Enter a unique name for your paper in the Custom Paper Size Name box.  
Select either inch or mm for the unit of measure.  
Type in the length and width.  
Click the Save button to store the size. If necessary, you can delete a  
preset size by choosing the Delete button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P C P R I N T I N G  
151  
Your Windows application software may override this setting. Make sure  
you have set the proper paper size in your application software. In addition,  
check the margin settings when you select the smallest paper size. If they  
are too large, it may result in nothing being printed.  
Paper Source  
For the MFC, you can choose Feeder or Manual.  
Feeder  
The multi-purpose sheet feeder is primarily used for printing on standard-  
size paper and envelopes.  
Manual Feed  
If your paper has difficulty feeding from the sheet feeder, we recommend  
using the Manual paper feed method. You will have to load paper sheet by  
sheet. The MFC stops before printing and the Printer Driver shows “Please  
load one sheet…” message. Insert a sheet into the manual feed slot and click  
“OK” to resume printing.  
Orientation  
Print orientation may be Portrait or Landscape. Portrait orientation means  
the page is taller than it is wide when you view the printed text upright.  
Landscape orientation means the page is wider than it is tall when you view  
the printed text upright.  
Scaling  
Use this function to reduce or enlarge your document, from 50% to 200%.  
We recommend the following percentages for the paper types shown.  
2 in 1  
Two pages are printed on one sheet at a reduced size. If you checked the “2  
in 1 box”, you cannot specify the scaling percentage manually.  
If your application software contains a similar function to this,  
both settings will be effective. Do not use the two selections  
simultaneously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
152  
Copies  
The Copies selection tells Windows how many copies you want to print  
from a software application.  
This setting is independent of the “copies selection” that may be  
available within the print menus of your software application.  
Do not use the two selections simultaneously.  
Collate  
In multiple page jobs that are uncollated, several copies of Page 1 are  
printed followed by several copies of Page 2, followed by several copies of  
Page 3, etc. For example, for 2 copies of a 3 page document, the MFC prints  
Page 1, Page 1, Page 2, Page 2, Page 3, and Page 3 in order.  
In multiple page jobs that are collated, a complete set of pages in a job are  
printed followed by another complete set of pages. For example, printing 2  
copies of a 3 page document, the MFC prints Page 1, Page 2, Page 3, then  
Page 1, Page 2, and Page 3 in order. In this case, the MFC starts printing  
after processing all the print data so that it takes a longer time for collated  
printing than uncollated printing.  
Reverse Order  
The MFC normally prints Page 1 and ejects it face-up so that the following  
pages are stacked on top of previous pages. (Page 5, Page 4, Page 3 .....  
Page 1) When you want to get correct-ordered printouts, use this function.  
The MFC spools the job in your computer and sends the data starting from  
the last page to the printer. Since the MFC prints from the last page for-  
ward, the printouts are stacked Page 1, 2, 3, ...Page 5. Please note that this  
function takes more time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P C P R I N T I N G  
153  
The Quality/ColorTab  
The Quality/Color tab enables you to select the print quality, media, colors  
(matched to PC monitor, custom colors, or mono), and document type.  
Click the Quality/Color tab to display this screen:  
Select the Apply button to apply your selected settings.  
To return to the default settings, click the Default button, then click the  
Apply button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
154  
Quality  
Select the print quality. The print quality and speed are related. Higher  
quality takes a longer time to print.  
Draft :  
360 x 180 dpi. The fastest print mode (approximately two to  
four times faster than normal mode) and gives lower ink  
consumption. Use this mode to print large volume documents  
or a document for proofing.  
Normal :  
Fine :  
360 x 360 dpi. Recommended mode for ordinary printouts.  
Good print quality with comfortable printing speed.  
720 x 720 dpi. Better print quality than normal and faster  
print speed than Super Fine.  
Super Fine : 1440 x 720 dpi. Use this mode to print precise images such as  
photographs. Since the print data is much larger than normal  
mode, processing time, data transfer time, and printing time  
will be longer.  
Media  
Select the media (type of paper). The MFC changes the way it places dots  
depending on the selected media type. To get good print output, make sure  
to select the correct media type.  
Selecting media type changes the print quality selection to the most suitable  
one as listed below. We recommend that you print with the preset quality for  
best printing result.  
Paper Type  
Suitable print quality  
Plain Paper  
Normal  
Normal  
Fine  
Super Fine  
Normal  
Normal  
Coated(360) Paper  
Coated(720) Paper  
Glossy Paper  
Transparency  
Transparency (mirror)  
Use only genuine Brother Coated Paper (Ink Jet), Glossy Paper, or  
Transparencies to get the best print quality. Non-Brother special paper may  
not produce the best quality.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P C P R I N T I N G  
155  
Color/Mono  
Color  
When your document contains color and you want to print it in color, select  
this mode. Only generic colors will appear on the printout (unless you also  
select color matching).  
Mono  
Select this mode if your document has only black and gray scale text and/or  
objects. Mono mode makes the print processing speed faster than color  
mode. If your document contains color, selecting Mono mode prints your  
document in 256 levels of gray scale.  
Controlling the Color  
To get accurate color matched output between the monitor and MFC, the  
color data should be adjusted for the MFC before printing.  
Color adjustment is provided by both Windows® 95 and 98 and this printer  
driver. Using this feature, the color data is adjusted by Win95 and 98 ICM  
or the Brother MFC-7100 series printer driver and you can get colors more  
closely matching those appearing on the PC monitor.  
When you are using a software application that has its own color matching  
engine, turn this setting off. The color matching system from that  
application is then used.  
Windows® 95 and 98 have color matching engines called ICM - Image Color  
Matching in its Operating System. ICM uses a profile of each device  
(monitor, scanner, printer, MFC) to know the characteristics of individual  
devices and correct the difference between them. When this is set to off, the  
Brother MFC-7100 Series printer driver will do the color adjustment. At  
present, the ICM feature is not supported by all the monitor and printer  
vendors and if ICM does not have your PC monitor’s profile, then ICM  
cannot work correctly. Moreover, ICM takes a longer time.  
When using Windows® 3.1 or 3.11, this selection is grayed (dimmed).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
156  
Document  
The printer driver will select the most suitable color matching method  
depending on your document type. Generally, text and business graphics are  
printed vividly and photographic images are printed softly.  
Auto  
The printer driver automatically selects the document type. In most  
cases, we recommend using the Auto setting.  
Photo  
Select this mode for Photographic images.  
Graphics  
Select this mode for documents that contain text or business graphics  
such as charts or clip art.  
Custom  
If you want to select the color matching method and halftone method  
manually, select this mode and press the Custom Setting button to  
access further settings.  
Custom Setting  
You can customize your settings by selecting the type of color matching,  
half tone, and effect that will be used.  
Color Matching  
You can select the color matching method manually. Since the way of  
reproducing color and the reproducible range of color between the monitor  
and the MFC are different, color matching adjusts this difference. There are  
several ways to adjust color for your MFC. Select the best one for your  
document. Execute PC monitor calibration to make these settings and make  
the result effective.  
Photo (Available only when ICM is turned On.)  
Suitable for photographic images. When adjusting color, color tone is  
kept as original as possible. All colors are adjusted evenly, so you can  
get natural color tones.  
Graphics (Available only when ICM is turned On.)  
Suitable for Graphics and text. When adjusting color, color vividness is  
kept as much as possible. You can get vivid and clear color.  
Logo (Available only when ICM is turned On.)  
When you need an exact color match such as for company logos etc.,  
use this selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P C P R I N T I N G  
157  
Match Monitor (Available only when ICM is turned Off.)  
Suitable for photographic images. Color is adjusted to get the closest  
color match to the PC monitor.  
Vivid Color (Available only when ICM is turned Off.)  
Suitable for business graphics such as charts, graphs, and text. The  
color is adjusted to give more vivid color.  
Halftone Pattern  
The MFC can use several methods to arrange where to place dots to express  
halftones. There are some predefined patterns used to place dots and you can  
select which one is used for your document. Select the appropriate method.  
Cluster  
This is suitable for business graphics such as charts, graphs and  
drawings, since this creates more sharp printouts. Moreover, the  
processing time is shorter.  
Photo  
This method creates smooth halftones so that this is suitable for  
photographic images. It takes more time to process data, but this can  
express more levels of halftones and creates more natural images.  
Effect  
Brightness  
Change the brightness of the whole image lighter or darker. Moving the  
scroll bar to the left makes your image darker and moving the scroll bar  
to the right makes your image lighter.  
Contrast  
Change the contrast of an image. Darker sections will be more dark and  
lighter sections will be more light as you increase the contrast. Increase  
the contrast when you want an image to be clearer. Decrease the  
contrast when you want an image to be more subdued.  
Red  
Increase the intensity of the Red color to add red to the whole image.  
Green  
Increase the intensity of the Green color to add green to the whole image.  
Blue  
Increase the intensity of the Blue color to add blue to the whole image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
158  
The Control/MaintenanceTab  
Select the Control/Maintenance tab from the Brother MFC-7100 Series  
printer driver dialog box:  
Select the Apply button to apply your selected settings.  
To return to the default settings, click the Default button, then click the  
Apply button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P C P R I N T I N G  
159  
Monitor Calibration  
If you want to get the closest color to your PC monitor on the printouts,  
calibrate your monitor by clicking this button.  
The method used to express color is different between monitors and the  
MFC. The PC monitor uses the three primary colors—Red, Green, Blue—to  
create full colors and the MFC uses four colors—Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,  
and Black—to create full colors.  
To get the closest color match, the color matching system should adjust the  
color by referring to the monitor’s characteristics and MFC’s characteris-  
tics. To discover the monitor’s characteristics, this monitor calibration  
program is used. As the printer driver knows the MFC’s characteristics, it  
converts the color on the monitor for the MFC.  
Bi-Directional Printing  
The MFC prints by moving its print head. Normally, it prints in both  
directions. By turning this option OFF (default setting is ON), the MFC  
prints (uni-directional) so that the print speed will be reduced to half.  
Sometimes the moving speed of the print head may not be stable due to  
temperature changes, etc., and the printed vertical line may not be aligned  
exactly. If you encounter this problem, turn this option off or use the  
Maintenance menu and adjust the vertical line.  
Maintenance  
Select the Maintenance button to display the Maintenance screen, where  
you can do a test print on the MFC to check the colors. If the test print  
shows a problem, you can clean the print head on the MFC.  
The Cleaning Tab  
Test Print  
When you see problems on printouts, click the Test Print button to print the  
test page and check if any dots are missing or ink cartridges are empty.  
Before printing the test page, load Letter size paper in the MFC. Press the  
Test Print button to start printing the test page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R S E V E N T E E N  
160  
Cleaning  
If you see dots are missing on the printout, clean the print head. Print the  
test page and to see which color has problems.  
Select the color to be cleaned.  
Press the Clean button.  
1
2
The MFC starts cleaning.  
Wait until Online shows again on the MFC display.  
The Printer Adjustment Tab  
Vertical Alignment  
If you see poor print quality,  
Please check that the printer is connected to the PC, turned ON and  
loaded with Letter size paper.  
1
Click the Vertical Alignment button to print a set of Vertical  
Alignment test patterns.  
2
Using the Up/Down scroll control, select the best aligned print sample  
(1 to 9) for 360 and 720 dpi.  
3
The best aligned sample is where the printed vertical line is straight and the  
upper and lower shaded squares are the same.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
Using the  
Multi-Function  
18  
Link Pro  
Software  
Introduction  
This chapter outlines the basics of the Brother software, so you can get started  
using the Multi-Function Link Pro software. Detailed installation and setup  
instructions are in the On-Line Documentation section of the Brother  
CD-ROM 1 that is included with your MFC.  
Check the online README.WRI file in the root  
directory of the CD-ROM 1 for last-minute  
important information and troubleshooting tips  
that were not included in the On-Line  
Documentation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
162  
The software included with your MFC consists of two parts, the Multi-  
Function Link Pro and Visioneer PaperPort LE for Brother.  
Multi-Function Link Pro  
The Multi-Function Link Pro Main Menu is the application used for all fax  
sending and receiving operations. It also contains an electronic Phone Book  
program and a Log Manager that maintains a record of all PC fax  
transactions. The Main Menu can be accessed through the Brother Multi-  
Function Link Pro program group.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G T H E M U L T I - F U N C T I O N L I N K P R O S O F T W A R E  
163  
Visioneer PaperPortTM LE  
Visioneer PaperPortTM LE for Brother is a document management  
application. You will use PaperPort to view incoming faxes and scanned  
documents and to scan paper documents into your computer. PaperPort has  
a sophisticated, yet easy to use filing system that will help you organize  
your documents. It allows you to combine or “stack” documents of  
different formats for printing, faxing, or filing. PaperPort can be accessed  
through the PaperPort program group.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
164  
Sending a Fax fromYour PC  
Sending a Quick Fax  
A QuickFax is a cover page only fax with a message. This option is very  
useful when you want to fax a quick, short message from your PC.  
From the Main Menu, select the QuickFax  
Select QuickFax from the Start pull-down menu. The QuickFax screen  
will appear.  
button—OR—  
1
2
Enter the Fax number, Name, and Company information in the  
appropriate fields on the screen—OR—Select the Open Phone Book…  
button to choose someone from your phone book.  
Complete the Subject and QuickFax note fields.  
Click the Send Fax button.  
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G T H E M U L T I - F U N C T I O N L I N K P R O S O F T W A R E  
165  
Sending a Fax from the Main Menu  
You can send a fax from the Main Menu and attach multiple files. The  
“attachments” can even be in different file formats.  
From the Main Menu window, select the Send Fax  
OR—Select Send Fax from the Start pull-down menu. The Send Fax  
button—  
1
window will appear:  
Enter the Fax number, Name, and Company information in these fields  
OR—Select the Open Phone Book button to choose someone from  
your phone book.  
2
Complete the Subject and Cover page note fields.  
3
4
Click on the Attachments… button to add any file(s) you want to fax  
with it.  
Click the Send Fax button.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
166  
Sending a Fax from a Windows® Application  
You can send a fax directly from any Windows® application using the  
following steps:  
Create the document in a Windows® application.  
1
Select Brother MFL Pro Fax as your printer.  
2
3
Select the Print command to begin the fax transmission. The Fax  
Sending dialog box will appear :  
Enter the name and fax number of the recipient—OR—Select the Open  
Phone Book… button and choose a name. Select Close to return to the  
Send Fax dialog box.  
4
Select the Send cover page check box to include a cover page.  
Select the Send Fax button.  
5
6
Receiving Faxes into the PC  
See  
Setting Up the  
MFC and  
Computer to  
Work Together  
p. 129  
To receive faxes into your PC through the MFC, you must first have  
connected your MFC to your computer. Then, you can load the  
Multi-Function Link Pro software.  
Use the following checklists for the MFC and PC, to make sure you have  
properly set up the MFC and PC to work together.  
Checklist for the MFC  
Function  
1
2
8
To make sure the MF Link mode is active, press  
,
,
,
.
1
2
3
Use  
or  
.
to select ON (not OFF).  
Set  
Press  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G T H E M U L T I - F U N C T I O N L I N K P R O S O F T W A R E  
167  
Checklist for Your PC  
In the Main Menu, select the Setup pull-down menu.  
Select Preferences...  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Under Answer Mode, select Fax only.  
Click the OK button.  
Make sure the MFC is connected to the PC.  
Keep the PC and the Multi-Function Link Pro Main Menu running at  
all times.  
Viewing Received Faxes  
Faxes that are received into the PC will appear in the InBox of the  
Log Manager. To access the Log Manager, from the Main Menu click the  
Log Manager  
button—OR—From the Start pull-down menu,  
select Mail/Log.  
In the Log Manager, select the Fax folder.  
1
2
Then select the InBox folder. A listing of your incoming messages will  
appear on the right side of the window.  
Double-click on the fax you wish to view.  
3
The Visioneer PaperPort Viewer will run automatically and the fax you  
selected from the list will be displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
168  
Scanning a Document  
TWAIN COMPLIANT  
The Brother Multi-Function Link Pro software includes a TWAIN  
compliant scanner driver. TWAIN drivers meet the standard universal  
protocol for communicating between scanners and software applications.  
This means that not only can you scan images directly into the PaperPort  
viewer that Brother included with your MFC, but you can also scan images  
directly into hundreds of other software applications that support TWAIN  
scanning. These applications include popular programs like Adobe  
Photoshop, Adobe PageMaker, CorelDraw and many more.  
To choose Brother Multi-Function Link Pro as your scanner driver, select it  
under the Select scanner—or—Select source option in your software.  
Accessing the Scanner  
From the PaperPortTM window, select the Scan or Twain button or from the  
File drop-down menu choose Acquire. Multi-Function Link Pro’s Twain  
dialog box will appear:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G T H E M U L T I - F U N C T I O N L I N K P R O S O F T W A R E  
169  
Scanning a Document into the PC  
Insert the document(s) face down in the document feeder of the MFC.  
1
2
Adjust the following settings, if needed, in the Scanner window:  
Resolution  
Color Type (Black & White, Gray [Error Diffusion], True Gray, 256  
Color, 24 bit color or 24 bit color [Fast])  
Size  
Select the Start button from the scanner window.  
3
When scanning is completed, press Cancel to return to the PaperPort  
window.  
Settings in the Scanner Window  
Resolution:  
Resolution: Select the scanning resolution from the Resolution drop down  
list. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time, but can  
achieve a finer scanned image. You can choose:  
100 x 100 dpi  
150 x 150 dpi  
200 x 100 dpi (Black & White, Gray [Error Diffusion] only)  
200 x 200 dpi  
200 x 400 dpi (Black & White, Gray [Error Diffusion] only)  
300 x 300 dpi  
400 x 400 dpi  
600 x 600 dpi  
1200 x 1200 dpi (Black & white, Gray [Error Diffusion]. True Gray,  
24 bit color and 24 bit color [Fast] only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
170  
Color Type:  
Black & White: Set the Color Type to Black & White for text or line art.  
Gray Scale: For photographic images, set the Color Type to Gray (Error  
Diffusion) or True Gray.  
Gray (Error Diffusion) is used for documents that contain photographic  
images or graphics.  
True gray mode is used for documents that contain photographic images or  
graphics. This mode requires the most memory and the longest transfer  
time.  
Colors: Choose either 256 Color, which scans up to 256 colors, 24 bit color  
24 bit color [Fast], which scans up to 16.8 million colors. Although using  
24 bit color or 24 bit color [Fast] creates an image with the most accurate  
colors, the image file will be approximately nine times larger than a file  
created with 256 Color. You have a choice of faster scanning with 24 bit  
color [Fast] or using the Brother Color Matching Technology with 24 bit  
color.  
Size:  
Set the Size to one of the following:  
Letter (8 1/2 x 11 in.)  
A4 (210 x 297 mm.)  
Legal (8 1/2 x 14 in.)  
A5 (148 x 210 mm.)  
B5 (182 x 257 mm.)  
Executive (7 1/4 x 10 1/2 in.)  
Business Card (60 x 90 mm.)  
Custom (User adjustable from 0.35 x 0.35 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)  
After you select a size, you can adjust the scanning area further by using the  
left mouse button to drag the dotted outline of the scanning area. This is  
useful when you want to crop an image when scanning.  
To scan business cards, select the Business Card (60 x 90 mm.) size setting  
and place the business card at the top center of a carrier sheet.  
Carrier sheets are available from your Dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G T H E M U L T I - F U N C T I O N L I N K P R O S O F T W A R E  
171  
When scanning photographs or other images for use in a word processor or  
other graphics application, you should try different settings for the contrast,  
mode and resolution to see which settings best suit your needs.  
Custom:  
This section displays the size you selected. To adjust the scanning area size  
to business card size automatically, check the Business Card Size box.  
Adjust:  
In the Adjust section, click the Image button. The Image screen will  
appear:  
Use the cursor to drag the indicator buttons to the left or right to adjust the  
Brightness and the Contrast, as needed.  
Paper:  
Check the Photo box if the image is a photograph.  
Video Capture:  
The Video Capture button displays the video frame grabber window. (See  
chapter Video Capture for details.)  
PreScanning an Image  
PreScanning allows you to scan an image quickly at a low resolution. A  
thumbnail version of the image will appear in the Scanning Area. This is  
only a preview of the image so you can see how it will look. The PreScan  
button is used to preview an image for cropping any unwanted portions  
from the image. When you are satisfied with the preview, select the Start  
button from the scanner window to scan the image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
172  
How to use PreScan to adjust an Image:  
Insert the document face down in the document feeder of your MFC.  
1
2
Select the PreScan button.  
The entire document will be scanned into the PC and will appear in the  
Scanning Area of the Scanner window.  
To crop a portion of the document to be scanned, drag any side or  
corner of the dotted outline in the Scanning Area with the left mouse  
button. Adjust the dotted outline until it surrounds only the portion of  
the document you wish to scan.  
3
Place the document in the document feeder of the MFC again.  
4
5
Adjust the settings for Resolution, Color Type (Gray Scale) and Size in  
the Scanner window, as needed.  
Select the Start button.  
6
7
This time only the selected area of the document will appear in the  
PaperPort window.  
In the PaperPort window, use the options available to refine the image.  
(See PaperPort for Brother online documentation for details.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G T H E M U L T I - F U N C T I O N L I N K P R O S O F T W A R E  
173  
Brother Resource Manager  
The Brother Resource Manager application must be running for you to use  
your MFC with your Windows® computer. Multi-Function Link Pro  
software and the MFL Pro Printer Driver automatically load the Resource  
Manager, as needed. The Resource Manager allows the single bi-directional  
Parallel port on the MFC to simulate a Communications port for faxing and  
scanning and to simulate a Parallel port for Windows® GDI printing. The  
MFC also can use Epson LQ-510, LQ-850 and LQ-2550 printer emulation,  
which do not require the Resource Manager.  
Video Capture from the PC  
Video Capture is the process of isolating a single frame (or picture) from  
media played on video equipment (such as a video camera or VCR) and then  
converting that frame into an image file on your PC. Once the frame is an  
image file, it can be saved, printed, faxed, and inserted into other files.  
Connecting Your Video Equipment  
Before you can begin to capture a video frame, you must first connect your  
video equipment to the MFC.  
To connect your video equipment:  
Connect your video cable into the jack on your video equipment labeled  
VIDEO OUT.  
1
Connect the RCA male plug on the other end of the video cable into the  
RCA female jack on the front of theMFC.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
174  
Capturing An Image  
You can access Multi-Function Link Pro’s Twain dialog box from the  
PaperPort for Brother viewer or from any application that is compatible  
with Twain scanning devices.  
To capture a frame as an image:  
Connect your video equipment to the MFC.  
1
2
From PaperPort, select Acquire from the File menu, or click on the  
Scan (Twain)  
icon.  
Multi-Function Link Pro’s Twain dialog box will appear:  
To access the Video Capture button, you must first select 24bit Color  
from Color Type drop down menu.  
3
4
In the Multi-Function Link Pro Setup (Twain) dialog box, click the  
Video Capture button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G T H E M U L T I - F U N C T I O N L I N K P R O S O F T W A R E  
175  
The Video Capture dialog box will appear.  
Select the Source of the video:  
5
6
Live Camera  
Tape/VCR  
Laser Disc®  
Digital Camera  
Select the Type of video:  
Auto-is the most common choice, since the system will determine  
the Type for you.  
Moving  
Still  
High Quality  
Pro Quality-is the highest quality.  
Select the Preview type:  
7
8
B & W-Black and White displays approximately four frames per  
second.  
Color-displays approximately one frame every two seconds because  
color images contain much more data.  
Select the Size (dots per inch) of the image file to be created:  
1280 x 960-is the best quality. The image file will be large and take  
more space on your PC.  
750 x 562  
640 x 480-is suitable for most images.  
320 x 240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R E I G H T E E N  
176  
Turn on your video equipment and start running the video.  
9
When you see the frame you want to capture, click the Pause button.  
10  
The frame will be displayed in the viewer screen section of Multi-  
Function Link Pro’s Twain dialog box.  
If you wish to capture the displayed frame, click the OK button, –OR–  
11  
If you are not satisfied with the frame that is displayed, resume running  
the video by clicking the Pause button a second time.  
The video will resume running.  
Click the Quit button to exit the Video Capture dialog box.  
12  
13  
Run PaperPort, where a thumbnail image of your frame will be  
displayed. (See PaperPort online documentation for details).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
C H A P T E R N I N T E E N  
Using  
Internet  
Faxing with  
TM  
19  
NetCentric  
FaxStorm  
NetCentric Internet Fax  
Internet faxing (NetCentric FaxStorm) brings together the power of the PC  
and the economy of the Internet. Outgoing faxes are relayed from your  
desktop to a network provider’s fax server over an IP connection. From the  
server, the fax job is transmitted across the Internet using sophisticated  
least-cost-routing algorithms, then delivered to a fax machine using local  
phone lines, or to another computer as an e-mail attachment. Faxes can be  
sent to a single recipient or to multiple recipients. NetCentric™ FaxStorm  
tracks your faxes to their destinations, and informs you of their status.  
When servers are down due to Internet outages, NetCentric™ FaxStorm re-  
routes your fax jobs and requests for account status.  
You can access incoming faxes from any web-connected desktop and even  
forward them to others directly from the Inbox account.  
For more information about how to use  
NetCentric™ FaxStorm, see the online HELP  
files after you install NetCentric™ FaxStorm on  
your computer. Use the Help pull down menu to  
access HELP.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
178  
Before You Begin  
Compatible Operating Systems  
NetCentric™ FaxStorm can be used with Windows® 3.1, 3.11, Windows®  
95, 98 and Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0 operating systems to  
integrate with your Internet fax account.  
Your Fax Service Account  
Before you can install NetCentric™ FaxStorm, you must use your  
established Internet Service Provider to go to http://www.faxstorm.com and  
set up an account with one of the Fax Service Providers. You will be given  
an Account Name and Password, which you will need to install  
NetCentric™ FaxStorm from the Brother CD-ROM.  
A fax account is available to any person or company who has Internet  
access. There is no charge for creating an account. You are charged only for  
use of services.  
A user account grants you access to many account features accessible from  
a web browser. You will have your own personal accounting and  
management web pages located on your local POPware server. These web  
pages will help you manage your account, view your account balance, pay  
invoices, check on the status of your faxes, and send faxes directly from a  
web form.  
Receiving Faxes  
The Fax Inbox receives faxes at your account on the POPserver. You can  
view faxes you receive. In order to use the Fax Inbox, you must establish an  
Inbound account on your primary POPserver.  
If your fax account is a subaccount of a corporate account, you cannot  
change the services available to your account. Contact the administrator of  
your corporate account for information about changing account services.  
The Inbox Detail window provides additional information on each fax job  
that is sent to your Inbox. To display the Inbox Detail window, double click  
on a fax job in the Inbox window.  
The Inbox Detail window displays:  
FaxID—Identification string set on the transmitting fax machine.  
Quality—Image quality of the fax file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
179  
Dialed#—The phone number that the sender dialed. This should be your  
inbound fax number.  
File Size—Number of bytes in the fax file.  
Received Time—Time at which the fax was received on the server.  
Transmit Rate—Transmission speed used to transmit the file to the server.  
From—Person or organization that sent the fax.  
JobID—Number that uniquely identifies the fax job. The JobID is  
comprised of the identification number of the server to which the fax was  
sent and a unique number that identifies the fax itself.  
Pages—Number of pages in the fax.  
Status—Final status of the fax job. Either DONE or FAILED.  
Creating An Inbound Account  
Log on to your account home page using a web browser or select Web  
from the Utilities menu, then select Account Home Page.  
1
Click the Options button on the left-hand side of your account home  
page.  
2
Click the Inbox icon. The Inbox frame appears within the browser.  
3
4
Choose two (2) items, one from each drop-down list:  
The server where you want to receive inbound faxes on the Internet  
Service Provider you use  
The notification method you want (Notify by Email, Forward by  
Email, or No Notification or Delivery)  
You will be provided with the telephone number of your fax Inbox. Give  
this number to people sending faxes to your fax Inbox.  
Installing NetCentric™ FaxStorm  
Before you begin, you must be connected to the Internet with your Browser  
running and be connected to your existing web-based NetCentric™ account.  
Login to your web-based NetCentric™ account.  
1
Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your computer CD-ROM drive.  
2
3
Click on the NetCentric™ FaxStorm button to install the software and  
follow the prompts on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
180  
If you are using a Proxy server, you must enter the server name and address  
on the second page of the Account Setup Wizard. See your Account  
Administrator for this information.  
Overview of Utilities  
NetCentric™ FaxStorm includes the following related utilities to help you  
manage your faxing activities:  
Contact Manager  
Use Contact Manager to organize your contacts and import database files of  
existing address books.  
Cover Page Builder  
Cover Page Builder is your creative tool to build a personal cover page. You  
can arrange fax merge fields to organize your own cover pages.  
You can build a cover page by using a fax file for a backdrop that you have  
created with the Print Driver. Using the Print Driver, you can convert a  
document created in any Windows® application into a fax file.  
Print Driver  
Use Print Driver to fax from any Windows® application through your fax  
account.  
The Print Driver also enables you to convert files to image files for use as  
attachments and send them as faxes from NetCentric™ FaxStorm. Once you  
convert and save a file as an attachment, it is always listed as an attachment  
in your Attachment List.  
Status Manager  
Use Status Manager to work with your fax account and manage your  
incoming and outgoing faxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
181  
Viewfax (A Fax File Viewing Application)  
Use ViewFax to view your completed fax at any time, before, or after, you  
send it from NetCentric™ FaxStorm. You can also use ViewFax to view fax  
files that you receive through your fax account, and to view other image  
files on your system. You can run ViewFax from Status Manager or as a  
separate application.  
When you run ViewFax as a separate application, you can open any image  
file on your hard drive. In the Viewfax window, you can save an image file  
on your hard drive as an attachment, TIFF image, or cover page.  
Accessing NetCentric™ FaxStorm  
Select the NetCentric program group, then select FaxStorm. The NetCentric  
FaxStorm window appears.  
Sending Faxes  
You can send a fax directly from the NetCentric™ FaxStorm, or use the  
Print Driver to send a fax from any Windows® application or as e-mail.  
The Send Fax dialog box has three tabs: General tab, Attachments tab and  
Options/Sender tab.  
To access the Send Fax Window, in the NetCentric™ FaxStorm window,  
select Send Fax from the Fax menu—OR—Click the Send Fax button.  
The Send Fax window appears:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
182  
General tab  
In the General tab you can address a fax to one or more recipients, choose a  
cover page, and determine the method for sending the fax. The only  
information required to address a fax is the destination fax number.  
However, to send a fax, you must send either a cover page or an attachment  
to the fax.  
Addressing A Fax  
To address a fax, complete the contact information on the left side of the  
screen. If you make a mistake, you can delete all the contact information by  
pressing the Clear button.  
To address the fax, enter recipient information in the address fields  
OR—Select a recipient from your contact database  
OR—Click the Group button to broadcast to multiple recipients.  
Adding Contacts One at a Time  
Enter the recipient’s information in the First Name, Last Name, or  
Company Name fields. The Contact Manager searches for the contact  
and fills in the rest of the recipient’s information—OR—  
If the recipient is not in its database, enter the information.  
If you do not want to save this recipient in your contact database, click  
the Add to List > button. The recipient’s name appears in the Recipient  
List box. (To delete a recipient from the list, click the Remove button.)  
You can broadcast a fax to multiple recipients by adding them to the  
Recipient List. You can add multiple recipients to your recipient list in one  
of two ways:  
Add each recipient manually (by name or company)  
Add groups from your Contact Manager database  
Selecting a Group (or a Contact from a Group)  
Click the Group button to display groups and contacts within the  
Groups.  
1
Click a group name to select it.  
2
3
Click the Add Group button to add that group to the Recipient List  
OR—To add a single contact within the group, click the contact  
name, then click the Add Contact button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
183  
To view the details about a recipient, select the recipient from the  
Recipient List. Then click the Detail button.  
4
5
Use the Send As drop down list to choose how faxes are sent to a group  
or to a contact.  
Selecting Fax sends the selected file to the fax number shown in the  
Fax # field. For convenience, you can use the country code lookup.  
Selecting E-mail sends the file to the e-mail address shown in the E-  
mail field.  
Saving a New Contact from the Fax Send Window  
After entering the recipient information for the fax, you can add the entry to  
your Contact Manager database:  
Click on the New Contact button.  
1
The New Contact window appears:  
In the New Contact window, click the group in which you wish to place  
the contact.  
2
3
To add more information about the new contact, click the Edit button to  
go to the Contact Detail window—OR—To save the new contact  
without opening the Contact Detail window, click the OK button in the  
New Contact window.  
Specifying a Cover Page  
Click the Cover Page check box to select the default cover page—  
OR—Change your cover page by clicking on the ... button to open the  
Cover Page window.  
1
Click the browse button in the Send Fax window.  
Select the name of the cover page in the cover page window.  
Select the default checkbox.  
2
3
4
5
Click OK to close the window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
184  
About Sending a Fax as E-mail  
You can send fax files and attachments to a recipient’s e-mail address rather  
than to a fax number. When fax files are sent by e-mail, they arrive as TIFF  
file attachments to the e-mail message. The recipient can then view the  
TIFF files with an e-mail utility or an external image viewing application.  
The e-mail message to which the TIFF files are attached includes a URL to  
a web page that instructs the recipient how to configure the e-mail  
application to view the TIFF file attachments.  
Most of the steps for sending fax files to an e-mail address are the same as  
for sending fax files to a fax number. The main difference is that you choose  
E-mail from the Send As options. You must specify a valid e-mail address  
for the recipient. Fax files that you have sent to an e-mail address appear in  
Status Manager as job type E-mail.  
If you are sending a fax to more than one recipient, choose E-mail from the  
Send As options. The application sends the selected files to the e-mail  
address of each person in the recipient list. If you have not provided an e-  
mail address for a recipient, the fax job to that recipient is not sent.  
Attachments Tab  
Use the Attachments tab to attach documents to your fax from your hard  
drive or from your Attachments list. Attachments must be image files,  
which you create from any Windows® application with the Print Driver.  
Attachments can be files with the following extensions: TIFF, ASCII, BMP,  
JPEG, GIF, PCX, ICON, PDF, and PSD.  
Select the Attachments tab from the Send Fax window.  
1
The Attachments window appears, and displays the files that are  
available:  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
185  
To place an Attachment in the selected window, click the name the  
Attachment, then click the Add button—OR—To select an attachment  
from your hard drive that is not in your Attachment List, click Browse  
to locate the file.  
3
Attachments you add from your hard drive in the Send Fax window are  
included only for that particular fax.  
Options/Sender Tab  
Use the Options/Sender tab to specify the billing code, resolution, request  
e-mail notification, when to send the fax and a change to the sender  
information.  
To set the defaults of all your faxes, click the Set Defaults button in the  
lower left-hand corner. Options modified in the Send Fax window apply to  
this fax only and appear on the cover sheet of your fax.  
Sending a Fax from Other Windows® Applications  
When you install the Print Driver (included with NetCentric™ FaxStorm)  
onto your computer, it will be available in your list of printers to use for  
faxing from any Windows® application.  
IfYou Are Using Windows® 95 or 98  
Open the document you wish to fax.  
1
2
Select Print from the File menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
186  
Select NetCentric™ FaxStorm from the list of printers.  
3
4
Click Properties (or click the button that displays the properties of the  
printer in the application you are using).  
Select Print to Fax and click OK to close the Properties dialog box.  
5
The Print Driver saves these properties until you change them again.  
If you are printing to a file rather than faxing, open the Properties  
dialog box to select Print2File.  
Click OK to print the document.  
The Send Fax dialog box appears.  
6
7
Enter the recipient’s fax number, select a cover page and any options, if  
desired.  
IfYou Are Using Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0  
In your Windows® application, open the document you wish to convert.  
1
Select Print from the File menu.  
2
3
In the Print dialog window, select NetCentric™ FaxStorm from your  
list of printers.  
Click Properties (or click the button that displays the properties of the  
printer in the application you are using).  
4
Select the Document tab and click the Print2File radio button.  
5
6
Select the File Options tab and click the Manual, prompt each time for  
file name radio button.  
Click the Programs tab and click the Run program after creating image  
file radio button.  
7
The Program Exec text box should contain the path to the quickfax  
executable. If the text box is empty, enter the path to the quickfax  
executable. It is located in the bin directory beneath the directory in  
which you installed the application.  
Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.  
Click OK on the Print dialog box.  
8
9
The file is now converted to a FAX file and the Send Fax application is  
launched, allowing you to fax the document you have converted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
187  
Setting Up Contacts in the Contact Manager  
In addition to saving recipient information when you address a fax in the  
Send Fax window, you can add contacts manually in the Contact Manager  
window. When adding a contact, you are creating an entry in an existing  
group in your Contact Manager database. You can add the contact to a  
subgroup that you have already created. However, if you do not select a  
group, then your contact is added to the top-level group All. After you have  
added a contact to Contact Manager, you can add or move it to different  
groups.  
You can create more than one address for each person, and Contact Manager  
treats each address as a separate entry in its database, even allowing you to  
place them in separate recipient groups. Each address can be viewed and  
edited in that contact’s Contact Detail Window.  
You can add, arrange, and delete contacts and groups of contacts. To view  
the contacts within each group, select the folder of that group. You can  
navigate through a group using alphabetic tabs. To view details of a contact,  
double-click on the name of the contact.  
To add a New Contact to the All Group:  
In the NetCentric FaxStorm window, Select New Contact from the  
Contact menu. The Contact Detail window appears:  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
188  
Enter additional information about the contact in the Contact Detail  
window.  
2
3
Click the OK button to save the new contact. The Contact Manager  
window appears listing the new contact in the All group:  
You can move the new contact to another group by selecting it and  
dragging it into that folder.  
Close the Contact Manager window, to return to the NetCentric  
FaxStorm window.  
4
To add a New Contact to Another Group:  
In the NetCentric FaxStorm window, click on the Contacts button—  
OR—Select Contact Manager from the Contact menu. The Contact  
Manager window appears.  
1
Click the folder where you want to place the new contact and click the  
New Contact button. The Contact Detail window appears.  
2
Enter the information about the contact in the Contact Detail window.  
3
4
Click the OK button to save the new contact. The Contact Manager  
window appears listing the new contact in the group you selected.  
Close the Contact Manager window to return to the NetCentric  
FaxStorm window.  
5
Changing Contact Detail  
Each contact has one Contact Detail window for all addresses, or locations,  
of that particular contact, even if the locations appear in different groups  
within the Contact Manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
189  
To edit the information of an existing contact, open the Contact Detail  
window for that contact:  
In the Contact Manager window, double-click on the contact  
OR—  
1
Select the contact in the Contact Manager window and select Edit/View  
from the Contact menu, or click the Edit/View button.  
When the Contact Detail window appears, enter the additional  
information and changes, as needed. If you are ready to accept your  
changes, skip to Step 5.  
2
3
To add another location for this contact, select the Add... button. The  
Add Location window will appear:  
Enter the name of the new location and click the OK button. The  
Contact Detail window reappears and you will be prompted to enter the  
new location information.  
4
When you are ready to accept the information in the Contact Detail  
window, click the OK button to save your changes.  
5
6
When the Contact Manager window re-appears, close it.  
Setting Up Multiple Addresses  
The Contact Detail window has three tabs: General, Notes and User Fields.  
The General tab of the Contact Detail window has a separate sub-tab for  
each address or location. On the General tab you can modify the contact  
information, add and delete addresses, launch a web browser to view that  
contact’s URL, specify the contact’s default medium for file delivery (either  
fax or e-mail) and go to the Country Lookup utility to look up country  
codes. See the online Help for more information.  
On the Notes tab, you can enter personal notes to the contact’s record.  
On the User Fields tab, you can define user fields for adding additional  
information about the contact.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
190  
Moving or Copying a Contact to Another Group  
In the Contact Manager window, you can move a contact from one group to  
another, or copy a contact from one group into another group.  
To move a contact from one group to another, select a contact and drag  
it into the destination group. A dialog box asks you to confirm the  
move.  
To copy a contact from one group to another, press the Control key,  
select a contact, and drag it into the destination group. A dialog box  
asks you to confirm the copy.  
Creating a Group for Broadcasting  
You can create groups in the Contact Manager so you can quickly address a  
fax to all the recipients in that group. If you create a new group without  
initially opening the Contact Manager window, then the top-level group All  
is selected by default.  
To set up a group to broadcast to multiple recipients:  
In the Contact Manager window, select the group folder under which  
you wish to assign the new group.  
1
Select New Group from the Contact menu—OR—Click on the New  
Group button in the Contact Manager window. The New Group  
window appears:  
2
Enter a name (up to 25 characters) for the new group.  
3
4
Click the OK button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
191  
Managing Your Faxes in the Status Manager  
The Status Manager connects to your account, retrieves your sent and  
received faxes and displays their status. You can open the Status Manager to  
check your faxes, or you can set the Status Manager’s options so that Status  
Manager checks the status at an interval you choose.  
The Outbox lists the faxes you have sent from your faxing account. Each  
fax is identified by the type (fax or broadcast), recipient name, subject,  
status, recipient phone number and fax number, creation time, and the type  
of the data transmission and speed of transmission. Faxes that were not sent  
from NetCentric™ FaxStorm are shown with an asterisk in the first column.  
Fax status might be stopped, completed, processing, queued, failed,  
scheduled, or sending to server.  
You can delete, move, sort, and manipulate the records of your faxes in  
Status Manager after they have been sent. You can move a fax to the History  
tab by clicking the Delete button and selecting that option.  
Accessing the Status Manager  
Click the Status button—OR—select Status from the Fax menu—  
OR—Select Status Manager from the Utilities menu.  
You will be prompted to enter your account name and password. The  
Status Manager window appears:  
Checking the Status of Sent Faxes (Outbox)  
Click the Outbox tab at the bottom left-hand side of the Status  
Manager window.  
1
Double-click the fax to view the Inbox Detail window for status  
information.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
192  
Click on a fax to select it, and click the View button to view the file. To  
delete a fax, click the Delete button.  
3
Viewing Faxes You Received (Inbox)  
Click the Inbox tab at the bottom left-hand side of the Status Manager  
window. FaxStorm downloads all faxes that have been sent to your  
Inbox.  
1
Click on a fax to select it, and click the View button to view the file.  
2
3
Double-click the fax to view the Inbox Detail window for status  
information. To delete a fax, click the Delete button.  
Managing Faxes from Your Account Page  
Your Fax Service Provider Account is a directory on the POPserver to  
which you were assigned when you created your account.  
Accessing Your Account Page  
You can access your account through a web browser home page using a  
URL similar to http://www.server.net/~accountID/ where www.server.net is  
your primary POPserver, and accountID/ is your account name or account  
ID  
OR—  
You can access your account directly from NetCentric™ FaxStorm by  
selecting Account Home Page from the Utilities menu. Each time you  
connect to your account home page, you must enter the account name and  
password.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G I N T E R N E T F A X I N G W I T H N E T C E N T R I C ™ F A X S T O R M  
193  
Viewing Received Faxes inYour Account Page Inbox  
Faxes that are sent to your fax Inbox can be viewed from your account home  
page, as well as from NetCentric™ FaxStorm. See online HELP if you need  
more information.  
Log on to your account home page using a web browser, or select Web  
from the Utilities menu, then select Account Home Page.  
1
2
3
Click the Faxes link on the left side of your account home page. The  
Faxes frame appears within the browser.  
Click the Inbox hypertext link. Your Account Page Inbox will be  
displayed, listing your received faxes.  
Checking Sent Faxes in Your Account Page Outbox  
You can check the faxes you sent from your account home page, as well as  
from NetCentric™ FaxStorm.  
Log on to your account home page using a web browser, or select Web  
from the Utilities menu, then select Account Home Page.  
1
Click the Faxes link on the left side of your account home page. The  
Faxes frame appears within the browser.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
N I N T E E N  
194  
Click the Outbox hypertext link. Your Account Page Outbox will be  
displayed, listing you sent faxes:  
3
Customer Support  
You can select Web Problem Reports from the Utilities menu of the  
NetCentric™ FaxStorm window. Your web browser will open the problem  
report page of NetCentric Corporation. Use this to send your problem  
directly to Customer Support at NetCentric Corporation, or  
Contact NetCentric Corporation at  
28 Crosby Drive  
Bedford, MA 01730 USA  
1 (781) 685-5200 (voice)  
9 a.m. to 6 p.m., EST,  
Monday through Friday  
1 (781) 685-5600 (fax)  
E-mail: [email protected] 24 hours a day 7 days a week  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y  
Using Automatic  
E-Mail Printing  
20  
Automatic E-Mail Printing  
(ForWindows® 95 and 98 Only)  
The Brother Automatic E-Mail Printing software is a utility program that  
reads your E-mail messages from a specified POP3 server and automatically  
prints to a printer.  
Please read this section before using the software.  
Check the online README.WRI file in the root  
directory of CD-ROM 1 for last-minute  
important information and troubleshooting tips  
that were not included in the On-Line  
Documentation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
T W E N T Y  
196  
Main Features  
You can use Automatic E-Mail Printing with other E-mail software:  
Brother Automatic E-Mail Printing has some extra functions that other  
E-mail software, such as Netscape NavigatorTM or MS Internet Mail, do  
not support.  
Automatic E-Mail Printing can be configured for a multiple user account:  
In Brother Automatic E-Mail Printing you can set more than one e-mail  
account on a single PC so you can print e-mail in each account  
automatically.  
Automatic access to your specifed POP3 server at the specifed time:  
You can specify the time when the Brother Automatic E-Mail Printing  
accesses the server to check for new mail.  
Provides an “In Memory” printer driver:  
You can receive and print e-mail data at the same time, by searching for  
a specified character string in the mail header. It allows you to see the  
sender, subject and relevant part of the mail content.  
Automatic E-Mail Printing is for Windows® 95 and 98 Only  
Automatic E-Mail Printing is a 32 bit software application. It cannot run on  
Windows® 3.1 or 3.11, even if Win32 is installed on your computer.  
You Cannot Use a 16 bit TCP/IP Stack  
To run Automatic E-Mail Printing, you MUST have a 32-bit TCP/IP stack.  
Windows® 95 or 98 provides built-in 32bit TCP/IP stacks that you can set  
up.  
IfYou Are Using Korean Windows® 95 or 98  
If you are using Korean Windows® 95 or 98, you must choose English in the  
Language menu of the installer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G A U T O M A T I C E - M A I L P R I N T I N G  
197  
Setting Up Automatic E-Mail Printing  
To access the Properties of Brother window and set up your options:  
From the Automatic E-Mail Printing window, select Properties from the  
1
Mail pull down menu.  
The User Settings window will appear.  
Select the User you want to set up and click the Properties button.  
2
The Properties of Brother window will appear:  
Setting Up the Server  
In the Server tab of the Properties of Brother window, you must enter your  
POP3 Server, POP3 Port, POP3 Account name, and Password. Check the  
Delete Function and Print Function options as desired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
T W E N T Y  
198  
Setting the Check Time  
In the Check tab of the Properties of Brother window, you can set up  
Automatic E-Mail Printing to check for new mail at specified intervals—  
OR—at a specified time—OR—every time you click the New Mail icon.  
Check the Display mail log checkbox if you want your log to show all new  
mail.  
Continue to set up the Page Setup, Print, Filter, Correction and Others  
(applications where you want to be able to view new e-mail messages) as  
needed. Please see Online Documentation and Help files on CD-ROM 1 if  
you need more detailed information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G A U T O M A T I C E - M A I L P R I N T I N G  
199  
Using Automatic E-Mail Printing  
In the Automatic E-Mail Printing window click the icon buttons for the  
following options: New Mail, Print, View, Delete, Properties, Hide your log  
information and Add to Task Tray.  
Uninstalling Automatic E-Mail Printing  
from Windows® 95 or 98  
You can delete the Automatic E-Mail Printing software, using the Add/  
Remove Program in Windows® 95 or 98.  
If the Uninstall Program Displays An Error Message  
When you install the Automatic E-Mail Printing software and create a user,  
a directory name is created for that user. The uninstall utility program has  
no knowledge of this user directory. So, when you run the uninstall utility  
program to remove the Automatic E-Mail Printing software, the uninstall  
program displays an error message. To resolve this difficulty, delete the  
“inetprn” directory and any sub-directories that the Automatic E-Mail  
Printing software created on your hard disc drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R  
T W E N T Y  
200  
To Access the Add/Remove Programs Properties Window:  
Close the Automatic E-Mail Printing application.  
1
Click the Start button in the Taskbar.  
2
Select Settings, then Control Panel.  
3
The Control Panel window appears.  
Double-click the Add/Remove Program icon in this window to run the  
4
Add/Remove Programs Properties utility program.  
In the Install/Uninstall tab, select Automatic E-Mail Printing from the  
5
list of programs.  
Click the Add/Remove button.  
6
Then follow the prompts on your computer screen.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y - O N E  
Color Faxing with  
3D FaxSpeed  
®
21  
(For Windows 3.1,  
3.11, 95 and 98 Only)  
How 3D FaxSpeedWorks  
3D FaxSpeed is a Windows® color PC fax software application that allows  
you to convert color image files so you can fax them to the receiving party’s  
PC. (The receiving party must be able to receive faxes and must have the  
free 3D FaxSpeed Reader program.)  
Because 3D FaxSpeed is a binary file transfer application, you can send,  
receive and store documents (including scanned documents) containing  
confidential information on plain paper in a special coded format  
(InfoImage). Transmission is through Multi-Function Link Pro software on  
your computer and reception can be either into your Multi-Function Link  
Pro Log Manager on your computer or on paper on your Brother MFC.  
Receiving parties that do not have an MFC and Multi-Function Link Pro  
software may receive InfoImages from you via their fax-modem or fax  
machine and scanner.  
The maximum InfoImage file size that can be transmitted is 32K.  
Special Coded Format (InfoImage)  
A 3D FaxSpeed InfoImage is a graphic image representation of digital  
computer files, generated by a proprietary procedure. On paper, an  
InfoImage is composed of block(s) of very small black and white squares:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y - O N E  
202  
This chapter is only an Introduction to 3D  
FaxSpeed. After you install 3D FaxSpeed on your  
computer, check the README.WRI file in the root  
directory of CD-ROM 1 for last-minute important  
information and troubleshooting tips that were not  
included in the On-Line Documentation. Use the  
Help pull down menu in 3D FaxSpeed to access  
HELP, as needed, to learn the many features and  
functions available in 3D FaxSpeed.  
Installing 3D FaxSpeed  
In the CD-ROM window, click the Install 3D FaxSpeed button and follow  
the prompts on each screen.  
If your Windows® Display System Settings (Windows® Setup) is set to a  
Large Font display, then there may be irregularities in the appearance of 3D  
FaxSpeed screens. 3D FaxSpeed cannot be used at all with Large Fonts and  
640x480 display resolution.  
Run Windows®, then insert the Brother CD-ROM #1 into your CD-  
ROM drive.  
1
When you insert the CD-ROM into the PC with Windows® 95 or 98, the  
screen appears automatically. (You can also run: x:SETUP.EXE from  
Explorer.) With Windows® 3.1 or 3.11, from the File menu run  
x:SETUP.EXE.  
2
Click on the 3D FaxSpeed button to start the install program.  
3
4
Type in your name or the name of your company. This name will be  
appended to each InfoImage to identify you as the sender.  
Click the Continue button.  
5
The second installation window appears with the path displayed as  
c:\FaxSpeed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G C O L O R F A X I N G W I T H 3 D F A X S P E E D  
203  
Click the Continue button to accept it.  
6
The third installation window appears with 3D FaxSpeed Standard as  
the name of the program group.  
Click the Create button to accept it.  
7
8
At the end of the installation, a success message should be displayed.  
Click the OK button to proceed.  
After installation is finished, a new 3D FaxSpeed program group  
containing the 3D FaxSpeed icons will appear in Windows®:  
3D FaxSpeed Standard Send: Activates the 3D FaxSpeed Send  
module.  
3D FaxSpeed Read: Activates the 3D FAX Read module.  
3D FaxSpeed Help: Activates the 3D FaxSpeed Online Help.  
3D FaxSpeed Macro Installer: Enables you to install a 3D  
FaxSpeed macro into your word processors. (See 3D FaxSpeed Macro  
on the following pages.)  
Create Read Module Install Disk: Enables you to create an  
installation disk of the Read Module for free distribution to recipients  
of your InfoImages.  
3D FaxSpeed Release Notes: Describes some undocumented  
features and special notes for 3D FaxSpeed. It is important that you  
print this file for reference.  
To start 3D FaxSpeed, select the 3D FaxSpeed icon of your choice.  
9
NOTE: Do not export or save files into any of the directories or  
subdirectories. Do not try to erase any 3D FaxSpeed directory or  
hidden file.  
Selecting Multi-Function Link Pro As Your Fax  
Application  
After installation, the first time you start the 3D FaxSpeed Send module,  
automatically you will be asked to specify the fax application to which 3D  
FaxSpeed will send the InfoImages. The 3D FaxSpeed Setup window will  
be displayed, listing all the fax applications, printers and other output  
devices found on your disk.  
Select the Brother MFC-7100 Series Fax driver and click the OK button.  
NOTE: An InfoImage is always in Portrait orientation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y - O N E  
204  
Creating 3D FaxSpeed Read Module Disks for  
Recipients  
You can create a disk of the Read module to give to recipients of your  
InfoImages, so they can convert and read them on their computer.  
Select the Create Read Module Install Disk icon from the Multi-  
Function Link Pro program group.  
1
The 3D FaxSpeed Copy Wizard window appears with the following  
message:  
Please insert 3D FaxSpeed Installation disk into drive a: or b: and  
press OK.  
Copy Wizard will help you to create a free distribution of 3D  
FaxSpeed Read Module.  
Insert your Brother Color MFC Suite CD#1 into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
3
Select the OK button. The Copy Wizard will not be able to locate the  
correct files. Select the BROWSE button and select the X:\3D directory  
of CD#1. Select the OK button.  
The following message will be displayed:  
Please insert clean, formatted disk in drive a: or b: and press OK.  
Insert a blank disk into your a: or b: drive.  
Select the OK button.  
4
5
After the disk has been created, you can choose to create another disk at  
the following message:  
3D FaxSpeed free distribution disk was successfully created.  
Do you want to create another one?  
Select the YES button to create another Read Module disk, or  
Select the NO button to exit.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G C O L O R F A X I N G W I T H 3 D F A X S P E E D  
205  
Quick Start Procedures  
If you want to start sending and reading InfoImages immediately, these are  
the basic procedures.  
How to Send an InfoImage  
You must be in the 3D FaxSpeed application to select the file(s) you wish to  
send as an InfoImage.  
To Send an InfoImage with 3D FaxSpeed Standard Send:  
From the 3D FaxSpeed program group, select the 3D FaxSpeed  
Standard Send icon.  
1
The 3D FaxSpeed Send dialog box appears.  
Select the drive and directory where the files you want to send are  
stored.  
2
3
Highlight the file(s) to be converted to the InfoImage format.  
NOTE: The InfoImage file size can not exceed 32K. You can monitor the  
file size during this file selection process by checking the Total  
Size (Kb) field in the InfoImage Contents section of this dialog  
box.  
Select the Add button.  
4
The selected files will be displayed in the InfoImage Contents dialog  
box.  
Select the Send button.  
5
The Sending InfoImage window appears.  
Then the Multi-Function Link Pro Send Fax dialog box appears.  
Enter the required information in the Send fax to field. You can select a  
fax number from your Multi-Function Link Pro Phone Book. (See your  
Multi-Function Link Pro Owner’s Manual for details).  
6
7
Select the Send Fax button.  
The Document Conversion window appears.  
Through the speaker of your MFC, you will hear the fax number being  
dialed and the fax transmission being sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y - O N E  
206  
Using the 3D FaxSpeed Macro  
To print the current document in your word processor directly to 3D  
FaxSpeed:  
Open your word processor application, and open or create the required  
document.  
1
Select the Run 3D FaxSpeed option from the File menu.  
The current file will be generated into an InfoImage.  
Then the 3D FaxSpeed Setup dialog box will appear.  
Specify the required settings in this dialog box.  
2
3
4
To change additional settings, select the Fax/Printer… button. The 3D  
FaxSpeed Setup dialog box will appear (see Selecting Multi-Function  
Link Pro as Your Printer).  
Select OK to send the InfoImage to Multi-Function Link Pro.  
5
How to Read an InfoImage that Was Printed at Your  
MFC  
If your system is set up to print received faxes at the MFC, the incoming  
InfoImage will be printed at the MFC. To read the printed InfoImage, you  
must first scan it into your computer so 3D FaxSpeed can read the file.  
Follow these steps when a received InfoImage printed at the MFC:  
After the InfoImage is received and printed by the MFC, place the  
printed InfoImage page(s) into the MFC’s document feeder.  
1
On your computer, open 3D FaxSpeed Read module and select the  
Brother MFL Pro Color driver to scan the InfoImage into your com-  
puter. 3D FaxSpeed will run the Multi-Function Link Pro Scanner  
application automatically.  
2
As each page is scanned, 3D FaxSpeed shows you how many  
InfoImage blocks have been read and how many are still unread. 3D  
FaxSpeed will not accept a page from a different InfoImage.  
After all the pages of the InfoImage have been scanned, 3D FaxSpeed  
automatically retrieves and decompresses the original files from the  
InfoImage and saves them in a Log file.  
3
4
3D FaxSpeed displays a list of the retrieved files and lets you save each  
one as a file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G C O L O R F A X I N G W I T H 3 D F A X S P E E D  
207  
NOTE: Even though the list of files and their content can be viewed, the  
actual files represented by the InfoImage are not saved unless  
you have saved them to disk.  
How to Read an InfoImage that Was Received Into  
MFL Pro  
When the Multi-Function Link Pro Message Center Counter is displayed  
and shows that you have received a new fax, you can skip going to the  
Multi-Function Link Pro Log Manager by clicking on the Fax counter. The  
Multi-Function Link Pro Viewer/Editor will be run automatically and your  
new fax will be displayed. If you view the fax and see that it is an  
InfoImage, remember the file name that appears in the title bar. It will  
include the path and file name, for example:  
C:\BRMFLPRO\FAXMANG\INBOX\FAX00001.HFX  
Now that you know the path and file name, you can exit Multi-Function  
Link Pro and go directly into 3D FaxSpeed to read the InfoImage file.  
Reading a file means to convert the file into its original file format, as  
follows.  
To read an InfoImage after viewing it in the MFL Pro Viewer/Editor:  
Close the Multi-Function Link Pro ViewerEditor.  
1
2
Run the 3D FaxSpeed Read module. The 3D FaxSpeed Read dialog box  
appears.  
Click the Select button. The Select dialog box appears.  
3
4
From the File Name list box, select the file name (that you saw in the  
ViewerEditor).  
Select the OK button.  
5
6
In the 3D FaxSpeed Read dialog box, select the Read button. The  
InfoImage Reader will look at the .HFX fax file and try to find the  
InfoImage data. If it sees a cover page (that is not included in the  
InfoImage data), the InfoImage Read Problem window appears with the  
message:  
Cannot read InfoImage page. File: fax?????.hfx page skipped.  
Click the OK button to proceed. 3D FaxSpeed will read each block in  
the InfoImage. You will see the name of the file(s) that were included in  
the InfoImage displayed in the InfoImage Contents list box.  
7
8
To view or save the file(s), select the View or Save button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y - O N E  
208  
NOTE: Even though the list of files and their content can be viewed, the  
actual files represented by the InfoImage are not saved unless  
you have saved them to disk.  
If the Recipient Uses Another Fax Application  
The recipient may use a PC modem and another fax application to receive  
faxes directly into a computer. As soon as the fax is an InfoImage on the  
computer, the recipient can go directly to 3D FaxSpeed to read it.  
3D FaxSpeed Read Module for Recipients  
To decompress and read your InfoImages, the recipient’s computer must  
have the 3D FaxSpeed Read Module Install Disk that you can create for  
them. (See Creating Read Module Disks for Recipients.)  
For recipients of your InfoImage who are using another fax application:  
The InfoImage is received into the recipient’s computer through  
another fax application.  
1
In the fax application, the recipient must save or export the InfoImage  
into a selected directory as a BMP, PCX, TIFF or DCX file:  
2
BMP, PCX and TIFF formats save each InfoImage page in a separate  
file.  
DCX format saves the entire InfoImage in a single file, even if it is  
more than one page.  
Select the 3D FaxSpeed Read icon to open the 3D FaxSpeed Read  
window.  
3
4
Select all the files that belong to a single InfoImage and activate the  
Read function to retrieve and decompress the files.  
3D FaxSpeed shows which blocks have been read and which blocks  
are still missing.  
The retrieved files are saved automatically in the Log file.  
In the 3D FaxSpeed Read window, a list of the retrieved files is  
displayed. You can view each file in its appropriate application.  
5
6
In 3D FaxSpeed, save the retrieved files.  
NOTE: Even though the list of files and their content can be viewed, the  
actual files represented by the InfoImage are not saved unless  
you have saved them to disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U S I N G C O L O R F A X I N G W I T H 3 D F A X S P E E D  
209  
If the Recipient Uses a Fax Machine and Scanner  
Recipients who receive fax transmissions on paper at a fax machine must  
use a scanner to scan the image into their computer.  
3D FaxSpeed Read Module for Recipients  
To decompress and read your InfoImages, the recipient’s computer must  
have the 3D FaxSpeed Read Module Install Disk that you can create for  
them. (See Creating Read Module Disks for Recipients.)  
For recipients of your InfoImage who are using a fax machine and  
scanner:  
The InfoImage is printed on the receiving party’s fax machine.  
Fax Machine / Scanner Requirements:  
1
2
The retrieved files are saved automatically in the Log file.  
Medium density format — If you sent the InfoImage in Medium  
density format, the recipient must scan the fax printout of the  
InfoImage into the computer using a 300x300 or 400x400 dpi  
scanner. For Twain-supported scanners, 3D FaxSpeed automatically  
will open the scanner application of the recipient’s choice. As the  
recipient scans each page, 3D FaxSpeed shows how many InfoImage  
blocks have been read and how many are still unread. 3D FaxSpeed  
will not accept a page from a different InfoImage.  
Low density format — If you sent the InfoImage in Low density  
format, the recipient can scan the InfoImage into the computer using  
a 200x200 or 300x300 dpi scanner.  
If a recipient’s scanner is not Twain compatible, the InfoImage can  
be scanned by its scanner application, saved to disk as a file, and  
retrieved by 3D FaxSpeed using the Read from file option.  
After all the pages of the InfoImage have been scanned, 3D FaxSpeed  
automatically retrieves and decompresses the original files from the  
InfoImage and saves them in a Log file.  
3
4
5
3D FaxSpeed then displays a list of the retrieved files and lets the  
recipient view each one in its appropriate application (if that  
application exists on the computer).  
In 3D FaxSpeed, the recipient must save the retrieved files.  
NOTE: Even though the list of files and their content can be viewed, the  
actual files of the InfoImage are not saved unless they have saved  
to disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y - O N E  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y T W O  
Optional  
Accessories  
22  
(For MFC 7160C Only)  
Memory Board  
The memory board is installed on the main controller board inside the MFC.  
When you add the optional memory board, it increases the performance for  
fax operations.  
Optional Memory for the Fax Operations  
The MFC 7160C can recognize 2MB (ME2000) of Optional Memory. Be  
careful to purchase the appropriate memory board.  
Additional memory for the fax will expand the memory used for sending  
and receiving faxes.  
Model Name  
Optional Memory  
Total  
MFC 7150C  
2 MB (up to 100 pages)  
N/A  
2 MB (up to 100 pages)  
MFC 7160C  
4 MB (up to 300 pages)  
2 MB (for Fax)  
6 MB (up to 500 pages)  
Using Brother #1 chart, with MMR coding and Standard Resolution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T E E N T Y - T W O  
212  
Installing the Optional Memory Board  
Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the interface  
cable.  
1
Remove the two screws securing the paper output slot in the front of the  
MFC.  
2
Paper Output Slot  
Pull out the paper output slot.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O P T I O N A L A C C E S S O R I E S  
213  
Hold the edge of the memory board and do not touch its surface. Insert  
the memory board into the connector on the Main Board and make sure  
it is securely seated.  
4
Return the paper output slot to its normal position.  
Secure it with the two screws.  
5
6
7
8
Reconnect the interface cable.  
Plug the power cord into the AC outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T E E N T Y - T W O  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y T H R E E  
Important  
Information  
23  
StandardTelephone and  
FCC Notices  
These notices are in effect on models sold and used  
in the United States only.  
This equipment is hearing aid compatible.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to  
emergency numbers:  
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for  
the call before hanging up.  
Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or  
late evening.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC Rules. On the rear panel of  
this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC  
Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this  
equipment. You must, upon request, provide this information to your  
telephone company.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a  
standard modular jack, USOC RJ11C.  
An FCC compliant telephone cord with a modular plug is provided with this  
equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone line  
or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68  
compliant. See the Installation section of this manual for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y T H R E E  
216  
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to  
your telephone line and still have those devices ring when your telephone  
number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices  
connected to one line should not exceed five (5). To be certain of the number of  
devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should  
contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your  
calling area. If your MFC 7150C or MFC 7160C damages the telephone line,  
the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible,  
they will notify you in advance. But if advanced notice is not practical, you will  
be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to file a  
complaint with the FCC.  
Your telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment,  
operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your  
equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you an  
opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.  
If you experience trouble with your MFC 7150C or MFC 7160C, please  
contact a Brother Authorized Service Center for information on obtaining  
service or repair. The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this  
equipment from the line until the problem has been corrected or until you  
are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.  
If you are not able to solve a problem with your MFC, contact Brother at  
USA:  
1-800-284-4329 (voice)  
1-908-575-8790 (fax)  
From within Canada: 1-800-853-6660 (voice)  
1-514-685-4898 (fax)  
From within Montreal: 1-514-685-6464 (voice)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I M P O R T A N T I N F O R M A T I O N  
217  
WARNING  
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables  
from the wall outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the  
telephone company or connected to party lines.  
Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the  
result of your use of this information, including direct, special or  
consequential damages. There are no warranties extended or granted by this  
document.  
Important—About the Interface Cable  
This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are  
applied to the USA only. The shielded interface cable supplied with your  
MFC should be used according to FCC 15.27 (C). In addition, a grounded  
plug should be plugged into a grounded AC outlet after checking the rating  
of the local power supply for the printer to operate properly and safely.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Declaration of Conformity (For USA Only)  
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
TEL: (908) 704-1700  
declares, that the products  
Product Name: MFC 7150C, MFC 7160C  
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference  
that may cause undesirable operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y T H R E E  
218  
Industry Canada Compliance Statement  
(For Canada Only)  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
Attention  
The MFC 7160C that you purchased contains a rechargeable internal  
battery (Ni-MN). At the end of its useful life, under various state and  
local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal  
waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details of  
recycling options in your area and proper disposal.  
If you have a problem, contact Brother service at  
USA:  
1-800-284-4329 (voice)  
1-908-575-8790 (fax)  
BBS:  
1-714-859-2610 (voice)  
1-800-853-6660 (voice)  
From within Canada:  
From within Montreal: 1-514-685-6464 (voice)  
International Energy Star Compliance Statement  
The purpose of the International Energy Star Program is to promote the  
development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment, which  
includes computers, monitors, printers, facsimile receivers and copy machines  
world-wide. As an International Energy Star partner, Brother Industries, Ltd.  
has decided that this product meets the guidelines of the program.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I M P O R T A N T I N F O R M A T I O N  
219  
Important Safety Instructions  
Read all of these instructions.  
1
2
3
4
Save them for later reference.  
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use  
liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
Do not use this product near water.  
5
6
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The  
product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.  
Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided  
for ventilation; to ensure reliable operation of the product and to  
protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or  
covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product  
on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never  
be placed near or over a radiator or heater. This product should never be  
placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.  
7
This product should be operated from the type of power source  
indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the type of power  
available, consult with your dealer or local power company.  
8
9
This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug, a plug  
having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit into only a  
grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable  
to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your  
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.  
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not place this  
product where people can walk on the cord.  
10  
11  
If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total  
ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension cord do not  
exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total  
of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed 15 amperes  
(USA only).  
Do not place anything in front of the machine that will block received  
faxes. Do not place anything in the path of received faxes.  
12  
13  
Do not touch a document during printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y T H R E E  
220  
Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots,  
14  
15  
since they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts  
resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any  
kind on the product.  
Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing  
covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points and/or other risks,  
and may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to Authorized Service  
Personnel. A list of Authorized Service Centers has been included for  
your convenience, or you may contact the following Customer Service  
Numbers for your nearest Authorized Service Center:  
USA:  
1-800-284-4329 (voice)  
1-908-575-8790 (fax)  
1-800-521-2846 (Fax-Back System)  
From within Canada: 1-800-853-6660 (voice)  
1-514-685-4898 (fax)  
1-800-681-9838 (Fax-Back System)  
From within Montreal: 1-514-685-6464 (voice)  
This product does not have an ON/OFF switch. Therefore, it is very  
important that you have easy access to the main plug and the main  
socket to which the plug is connected, in case the main power to the  
MFC must be disconnected quickly.  
16  
17  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to  
Authorized Service Personnel under the following conditions:  
A
B
C
D
When the power cord is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid has been spilled into the product.  
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the product does not operate normally when the operating  
instructions are followed. Adjust only those controls that are  
covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other  
controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work  
by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
E
F
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.  
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating  
a need for service.  
To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of  
a power protection device (Surge Protector).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I M P O R T A N T I N F O R M A T I O N  
221  
Notice – Disclaimer of Warranties  
BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS,  
EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS (COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR)  
MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING  
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES  
NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS  
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE  
SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,  
RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK  
AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS  
ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS  
NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY  
NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU  
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION,  
AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE  
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION  
OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,  
THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ANY  
EVENT BROTHER’S LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL  
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS  
OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR  
OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.  
Compilation and Publication Notice  
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been  
compiled and published, covering the latest product descriptions and  
specifications.  
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are  
subject to change without notice.  
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the  
specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for  
any damages (including consequential) caused by reliance on the materials  
presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors relating  
to the publication.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y T H R E E  
222  
Trademarks  
The brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
© Copyright 1997 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.  
© Copyright 1997 Smith Micro Software, Inc. All rights reserved.  
© Copyright 1997 Visioneer, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft in the U.S.  
and other countries.  
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft in the U.S.  
and other companies.  
3D FaxSpeed is a registered trademark of Fontech Ltd.  
Visioneer PaperPort LE is a registered trademark of Visioneer, Inc.  
TextBridge is a trademark of Xerox Imaging Systems, Inc.  
NetCentric™, FaxStorm™ are registered trademarks of NetCentric  
Corporation.  
Excel and Word are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.  
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a  
Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.  
Epson is a registered trademark and LQ-510, LQ-850 and LQ-2550 are  
trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.  
IBM, IBM PC and Proprinter are registered trademarks of International  
Business Machines Corporation.  
Hammermill copyplus white is a registered trademark of International Paper.  
All other brand and product names mentioned in this manual are  
registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F O U R E  
Specifications  
24  
Product Description  
The MFC 7150C is a 6 in 1 Multi-Function Center: Color Printer, Color  
Copier (single copies), Color Scanner, Plain Paper Fax, Color PC Fax (via  
your PC) and Video Capture. The MFC 7160C is a 7 in 1 Multi-Function  
Center: Color Printer, Color Copier (multiple copies), Color Scanner, Plain  
Paper Fax, Message Center, Color PC Fax (via your PC) and Video Capture.  
Fax Specifications  
Compatibility  
Coding System  
Modem Speed  
ITU-T Group 3  
MH/MR/MMR  
14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400  
Automatic Fallback  
Cut Sheet Size  
Min. 2.75" (W) x 5.0" (L)  
Max. 8.5" (W) x 14.0" (L)  
Scanning/Printing Width 8.2 inches (208 mm)  
Paper Cassette  
Printer Type  
Gray Scale  
200 Sheets (20 lbs.)  
Ink Jet  
256 levels (Error Diffusion)  
LCD, 16 characters x 2  
Standard, Sequential  
Display  
Polling Types  
Contrast Control  
Automatic/Super Light/Super Dark  
(manual setting)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F O U R  
224  
Resolution  
• Horizontal 203 dot/inch (8 dot/mm)  
• Vertical  
Standard—98 line/inch  
(3.85 line/mm)  
Fine, Photo—196 line/inch  
(7.7 line/mm)  
Superfine, Photo—392 line/inch  
(15.4 line/mm)  
Memory Capacity  
MFC 7150C—2 MB (up to 100 pages)  
MFC 7160C—4 MB  
(up to 300 pages/up to 99 minutes)  
One Touch Dial  
Speed Dial  
12 x 2  
56 stations (MFC 7150C)  
100 stations (MFC 7160C)  
Automatic Redial  
Speaker Type  
Auto Answer  
3 times at 5 minute intervals  
Full Duplex (For MFC 7160C Only)  
0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings  
Communication Source Public switched telephone network  
Operating Environment 50–95° F (10–35° C)  
Best Print Quality  
68–91° F (20–33° C)  
Power Source  
120V AC 50/60Hz  
(USA, Canadian Version Only)  
Power Consumption  
Dimensions  
Standby: under 10 watts  
Peak: under 75 watts  
21.3 x 15.4 x 9.7 (inches)  
540 x 390 x 247 (mm)  
Weight  
20lb/9kg  
* “Pages” refers to the “Brother Standard Chart No. 1” (a typical business  
letter, Standard resolution). Specifications and printed materials are  
subject to change for improvement without prior notice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
225  
Printer Specifications  
Printing  
Print Method  
Piezo with 64 x 4 nozzles  
1440 x 720 dots per inch (DPI)  
Resolution  
720 x 720 dots per inch (DPI)  
360 x 360 dots per inch (DPI)  
360 x 180 dots per inch (DPI)  
Print Speed  
up to 6 pages/minute (Mono)  
up to 4 pages/minute (Color)  
Print Width  
8 inches (203.2 mm)  
Resident Fonts  
Bitmap fonts  
Roman 10, 12, 15, PS  
Disk-Bbased Fonts  
35  
Controller  
Emulations  
Interface  
GDI/EPSON ESC/P (LQ-510, LQ-850, LQ-2550)  
A shielded cable to IEEE 1284 (bi-directional)  
specification less than 6.5 feet (2 m) long  
should be used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F O U R  
226  
Print Media  
Paper Input  
Automatic loading from the Multi-Purpose  
Sheet Feeder or manual loading from the  
Manual Feed Slot  
Paper type:  
Plain paper, coated paper, glossy paper,  
transparancies, organizer paper (J (from the  
Manual Feed Slot only), K, L) and  
envelopes  
Paper size:  
Letter, Legal, A5, B5, Executive, envelopes  
(commercial No. 10, DL, C5) organizer (J  
(from the Manual Feed Slot only), K, L)  
Width  
2.75–8.5" (70–216 mm)  
5–14" (127–356 mm)  
16–32 lb (60–120 g/m2)  
Length  
Weight  
Maximum feeder capacity: Approx. 200  
sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) plain paper.  
Paper Output  
Approximately 75 sheets of plain paper  
(Face up print delivery to the paper output tray)  
It is recommended that printed sheets are taken  
from the paper output tray immediately after  
printing.  
Ink  
Black and 3 individual color ink cartridges  
separate from the print head  
Service Life of Ink Cartridge  
Approximately 750 page/Black cartridge at 5%  
coverage  
Approximately 400 page/Color cartridge at 5%  
coverage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
Troubleshooting  
and Maintenance  
25  
Troubleshooting  
Fax-Back System  
Brother Customer Service has installed an easy-to-use Fax-Back System, so  
you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product  
information for all Brother products. This system is available 24 hours a  
day, 7 days a week. You can use the system to send faxes to any fax  
machine, not just the one from which you are calling.  
If you can’t resolve a difficulty with your MFC using this manual, call our  
Fax-Back System and follow the voice prompts to receive faxed  
instructions about using the system, and an index of Fax-Back subjects.  
USA:  
1-800-521-2846  
1-800-681-9838  
From within Canada:  
The Brother USA Fax-Back System number (USA only) has been  
preprogrammed on One Touch key  
.
Brother on the World Wide Web  
You can find more information about Brother products, from product  
specification sheets to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), on the  
World Wide Web. Visit us at  
http://www.brother.com  
Brother Bulletin Board  
Brother’s Bulletin Board Numbers are  
USA:  
1-888-298-3616  
1-514-685-2040  
From within Canada:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
228  
Error Messages  
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may sometimes occur. If  
this happens, your MFC often identifies the problem and displays an error  
message. The table below explains the most common error messages.  
You can correct most problems by yourself. If you need additional help, call  
the Brother Fax-Back System.  
USA:  
1-800-521-2846  
1-800-681-9838  
From within Canada:  
ERROR MESSAGE  
CAUSE  
ACTION  
CHECK CASSETTE MFC cassette cover is open or MFC cassette is Close cassette cover or install cassette  
not installed properly.  
MFC is out of paper.  
properly.  
CHECK PAPER  
Add paper to cassette.  
CHECK PAPER SIZE Your Paper Size setting may not match the Change either paper in cassette or change Paper  
size of paper in the cassette.  
Size setting.  
COMM. ERROR  
Poor phone line quality caused  
communication error.  
Try the call again. If problem continues, call  
Telephone Company to check your phone line.  
CONNECTION FAIL You tried to poll a fax machine that is not in Verify the other party’s polling setup.  
Polled Waiting mode.  
COOLING DOWN  
The print head has overheated.  
Unplug the MFC and wait 30 minutes for  
it to cool.  
COVER OPEN  
Top cover is not closed completely.  
Open, then close, the cover.  
DISCONNECTED  
The other party or other party’s fax machine Try to transmit or receive again.  
terminated the call.  
DOCUMENT JAM  
Documents were not inserted or fed properly, See p. 229.  
or document was longer than about 40"  
inches (90cm).  
INK EMPTY  
One or more of the ink cartridges is out of ink. Replace the ink cartridges. See pp. 243–246.  
MACHINE ERROR  
XX  
MFC has a mechanical problem  
Call Brother Customer Service.  
USA:  
1-800-284-4329  
From within Canada: 1-800-853-6660  
From within Montreal:1-514-685-6464  
MEMORY FULL  
NEAR EMPTY  
You can’t store data in the memory.  
See p. 116.  
One or more of the ink cartridges is running Order a new ink cartridge. See pp. ii.  
out of ink.  
NO RESPONSE/BUSY The number you dialed does not answer or Verify the number and try again.  
is busy.  
NOT REGISTERED You tried to access a One Touch or Speed Dial Set up the One Touch or Speed Dial number.  
number that is not programmed.  
The paper is jammed in the MFC.  
See pp. 71–73.  
PRINTER JAM  
See pp. 230–233.  
SET CARTRIDGES An ink cartridge is not installed properly.  
Re-install the ink, seating it properly. See  
pp. 243–246.  
WARMING UP The print head detects low temperature.  
Wait until the MFC warms up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
229  
Document Jam  
If the original document is jammed, follow the steps as below.  
Control  
Panel  
Cover  
Remove any paper from the document feeder that is not jammed.  
Lift the control panel cover.  
1
2
3
4
5
Pull the jammed document out toward the front of the MFC.  
Close the control panel cover.  
Stop  
Press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
230  
Printer Jam or Paper Jam  
Remove the jammed paper depending on where it is jammed in the MFC.  
Paper is jammed in the multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
Cassette  
Cover  
Multi-Purpose  
Sheet  
Feeder  
Open the cassette cover and pull the jammed paper upwards and remove it.  
1
2
If the paper can’t be pulled out easily, remove the multi-purpose sheet  
feeder.  
Open the cassette and remove the paper from the multi-purpose sheet  
feeder in the easiest direction.  
3
Paper is jammed in the manual feed slot.  
Manual  
Feed  
Slot  
Pull the jammed paper upward and remove it.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
231  
If the paper can’t be pulled out easily, remove the multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
2
Holding the cassette, pull the jammed paper out of the multi-purpose  
sheet feeder from underneath the cassette.  
3
Paper is jammed inside the MFC.  
Remove the multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
1
Multi-purpose  
Sheet  
Feeder  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
232  
Lift the top cover to see where the paper is jammed.  
2
2
Top Cover  
1
1
Paper is jammed inside front of MFC.  
Release Lever (Blue)  
Hold Up Lever  
Close the top cover.  
1
Pull the paper toward you while you hold up the blue release lever at  
the rear of the MFC.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
233  
Replace the multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
3
2
Paper is jammed inside back of MFC.  
Release Lever (Blue)  
Hold Up Lever  
Pull the paper out of the back of the MFC while holding up the blue  
release lever at the rear of the MFC.  
1
Close the top cover.  
2
3
Replace the multi-purpose sheet feeder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
234  
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your MFC  
If you think there is a problem with your MFC, make a copy first. If the  
copy looks good, the problem is probably not your MFC. Check the chart  
below and follow the troubleshooting tips.  
DIFFICULTY  
SUGGESTIONS  
Printing or Receiving Faxes  
Condensed Print and Horizontal Streaks / If your copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or  
Top and Bottom of Sentences Are Cut Off interference on the phone line. If the copy looks bad, call Brother Customer  
Service at 1-800-284-4329 (USA), 1-800-853-6660 (from within Canada) or  
1-514-685-6464 (from within Montreal).  
Poor Quality Print  
Make sure the Printer Driver matches the type of paper you are using (see Print  
Media on p. 226). If you are using plain paper, try using recommended special  
paper (see Chapter 3). Don’t handle the paper until the ink is dry. Adjust the  
Vertical Alignment (see p. 237).  
Printing Too Dark or Too Light  
Make sure your ink cartridges are fresh. Cartridges are good up to two years,  
after that the ink may become clogged. Cartridge expiration dates are printed  
on the package. Make sure the Printer Driver matches the type of paper you  
are using (see Print Media on p. 226). Try using recommended special paper  
(see Chapter 3). The recommended environment for your MFC is between  
50 º F to 95 º F.  
Printing Appears Dirty or Ink Seems to Run Make sure you are using the recommended paper (see Chapter 3). Don’t  
handle the paper until the ink is dry.  
The recommended environment for your MFC is between 50º F to 95º F.  
White Lines in Text or Graphics  
Clean the print head (see Cleaning the Print Head on p. 236).  
Stains Appear on the Reverse Side or at the Make sure the Printer Platen and Pick Up Roller are not dirty with ink mist.  
Bottom of the Page  
(See pp.242–243).  
Vertical Black Lines When Receiving  
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the  
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.  
If the problem continues, call Brother Customer Service at 1-800-284-4329  
(USA).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
235  
DIFFICULTY  
SUGGESTIONS  
Phone Line or Connections  
MFC Does Not Answer When Called  
Make sure the MFC is in the correct receiving mode for your setup (either FAX,  
FAX/TEL or MSG CTR). Check for dial tone. If possible, call your MFC to hear  
it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord connection.  
Connect a standard telephone handset to the MFC telephone jack. If there is no  
ringing when you call your MFC, call your Telephone Company to check the line.  
Hook  
No Dial Tone on the Handset  
Press  
or Speaker Phone . If you hear no dial tone, check telephone  
line cord connections at the MFC and wall jack. Check that the handset is  
connected to the MFC’s handset jack. Test the wall jack with another single  
line telephone. If no dial tone on the wall outlet, call your Telephone Company.  
Sending Faxes  
Poor Transmitting Quality  
Try changing your resolution to FINE or SUPERFINE. Make a copy to verify  
your MFC’s scanner operation.  
Transmission Verification Report says  
“Result:NG”  
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.  
If the problem continues, call the Telephone Company to check your phone line.  
Vertical Black Lines When Sending  
If the copy you made shows the same problem, your scanner is dirty  
(see Cleaning the Scanner p. 242).  
Handling Incoming Calls  
Double Ring in FAX/TEL Mode  
The MFC knows the incoming call is not a fax so it is signaling you to answer  
the telephone call. Pick up the MFC handset or answer from an extension phone  
and press your MFC’s Telephone Answer Code (default setting is #51).  
Start  
and hang up immediately. If you  
answered at an extension phone, press your Fax Receive Code (default  
setting is 51). When your MFC answers, hang up.  
Transferring a Fax Call to the MFC  
Custom Features on a Single Line  
If you answered at the MFC, press  
If you have Call Waiting, Caller ID, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Ring Master,  
Voice Mail, an answering machine, alarm system or any other custom feature  
on a single phone line with your MFC, it may create a problem sending or  
receiving fax data.  
For example: If you are sending or receiving a fax message while a custom  
feature signal comes through on the line, the signal can temporarily interrupt  
or disrupt the fax data. Brother’s ECM feature should help overcome this  
problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry, and is  
common to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared  
line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your  
business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.  
Printer Difficulties  
Horizontal lines appear in Text or Graphics. Clean the print head (see Cleaning the Print Head on p. 236). If you clean the  
print heads five times and the print has not improved, call Brother Customer  
Service at 1-800-284-4329 (USA), 1-800-853-6660 (from within Canada) or  
1-514-685-6464 (from within Montreal).  
You see the “New Hardware Found”  
Click on the ‘Do not install a driver. (Windows will not prompt you again)’ and  
message on your PC screen (although you click ‘OK’.  
have already installed the drivers in  
Windows 95 or 98).  
The MFC does not print data in the  
correct position.  
Select the correct paper size using the DOS Utility program. Since paper  
adjustment is different between ESC/P (right) and the MFC (center), the printing  
position should be adjusted for the MFC.  
Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ printing.  
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver  
are the same.  
Cannot print when using Paint Brush.  
Try setting the Display setting to ‘256 colors’.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
236  
DIFFICULTY  
SUGGESTIONS  
Printer Difficulties (Continued)  
Cannot print when using Adobe Illustrator. Try to reduce the printing resolution.  
Thick line and thin line appear alternately. Turn OFF ‘Bi-Directional Printing’ from the ‘Control/Maintenance’ tab  
(banding)  
in the printer driver.  
There are some dense lines.  
Turn ON ‘Reverse Order’ from the ‘Paper’ tab in the printer driver.  
When using ATM fonts, some characters If you are using Windows 95 or 98, select ‘Printer Settings’ from the ‘Start’ menu.  
are missing or some characters are  
printed in the same place.  
Open ‘Brother MFC-7100’ properties. Click ‘Spool Setting’ on the ‘Details’ tab.  
Select ‘RAW’ from ‘Spool Data Format’. Do NOT clean the print head by  
touching it with your hand or a cloth (see p. 236).  
When using Power Point or Excel, hatch Open the ‘Quality/Colour’ tab in the printer driver, and change the ‘Document  
pattern is not what you are expecting.  
Type’ to ‘Photo’.  
Video Capture  
LCD does not show “Video: Press Copy Check the video cable connection to the MFC’s RCA pin jack. Check  
Capture Ready”  
that the video equipment is sending a signal (video equipment is turned on  
and set to the correct setting).  
How to Improve Print Quality  
Test Print  
If the quality is not satisfactory, first print a test page to help you identify  
settings you may want to change.  
Function  
2
1
Press  
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
1.TEST PRINT  
Set  
Press  
Press  
Press  
.
2
3
4
Start  
Stop  
. The MFC begins printing.  
to exit.  
Cleaning the Print Head  
Clean the print head if you get a horizontal line in the text or graphics on  
your printed documents. You can clean the four color (black, cyan, yellow,  
magenta) print heads (or a single color) by using Ink Management or from the  
printer driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
237  
Caution  
Do NOT clean the print head by touching it with your hand or a cloth.  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
.
Ink Management  
1
2
3
4
1
to choose 1.CLEANING.  
or  
to choose the color you want to clean.  
Set  
to clean the print head automatically.  
When cleaning is finished, the MFC will go back online automatically.  
Caution  
If you clean the print head at least five times and the print has not improved,  
call Brother Customer Service for assistance at 1-800-284-4329 (USA),  
1-800-853-6660 (from within Canada), or 1-514-685-6464 (from within  
Montreal). You may have to replace the print head. (Replacement  
instructions are included with the HD002, print head accessory).  
WARNING  
Do NOT touch the print head unless you are replacing it. Touching the print  
head may cause permanent damage and may void the print head’s warranty.  
Aligning Ink Cartridges  
This feature allows you to check and align the ink cartridges to assure best  
print quality. Make sure there is paper in the cassette before you start the  
alignment procedure.  
Function  
2
2
Press  
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
2.VERTICAL ALIGN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
238  
Start  
Press  
. The MFC prints a sample page.  
2
Study the alignment page and decide which sample numbers show the  
most evenly printed ink lines for 360 and 720 dpi. The screen displays  
360 DPI ADJUST  
ENTER NO.(1-9)  
Using the dial pad, enter the level of adjustment needed for 360 dpi (1 to  
9).  
3
4
The screen displays  
720 DPI ADJUST  
ENTER NO.(1-9)  
Using the dial pad, enter the level of adjustment needed for 720 dpi (1 to 9).  
5
6
7
Print another sample Test Print and check it (see p. 159).  
Stop  
Press  
to exit.  
Turning Off Bi-directional Printing  
You can further improve print quality by turning off bi-directional printing  
and setting the MFC to print in one direction only. However, this will  
reduce print speed by one half.  
Function  
2
3
Press  
,
,
. The screen displays  
1
3.BI-DIR PRINT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
239  
2
1
Press  
to select OFF (or  
to select ON).  
2
Don’t handle the paper until the ink is dry  
Special ink jet, glossy and transparency paper will take longer to dry than  
plain paper, so do not touch the printed copy until the ink has dried.  
Packing and Shipping the MFC  
Whenever you transport the MFC, use the packing materials that came with your  
MFC. If you do not pack the MFC correctly, you could void your warranty.  
Unplug the MFC from the telephone wall socket.  
Unplug the MFC from the AC outlet.  
1
2
WARNING  
Do not unplug the MFC after a print job until you hear the final  
click.  
Remove the paper wire extension, paper tray, document tray, document  
wire extension, and handset, and pack them.  
3
WARNING  
Please remove the ink cartridges and fit the yellow shipping cover. Damage  
to your print head  
resulting from packing without the yellow shipping cover will void your  
warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
240  
Wrap the MFC in the plastic bag and place it in the original carton with  
the original packing material.  
4
Place additional parts (such as cords and trays) and documents (such as  
your manual) into the carton.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
241  
Close the carton.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
242  
Regular Maintenance  
Cleaning the Scanner  
Unplug the MFC and open the control panel cover. Clean the flat white  
pressure bar and the glass strip under the bar with isopropyl alcohol on a  
lint-free cloth. If the screen still displays a scanner error, call Brother  
Customer Service, see p. i.  
Control  
Panel  
Cover  
Cleaning the MFC Printer Platen  
When you want to clean your MFC printer platen, wipe it with a lint free  
cloth that is dry or lightly moistened with isopropyl alcohol.  
Printer Platen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
243  
Cleaning the Pick-up Roller  
Remove the Multi-Puropose Sheet Feeder from the printer platen.  
1
2
Wipe the pick-up rollers with a cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol.  
Multi-Purpose  
Sheet Feeder  
Pick-up Rollers  
Refit the Feeder to the printer platen.  
3
WARNING  
Be sure to unplug the MFC from the main power outlet before cleaning  
the printer platen and pick-up rollers.  
Be careful not to touch the paper feed star wheels and flat cable.  
Replacing the Ink Cartridges  
Your MFC is equipped with an ink dot counter that automatically monitors  
the ink level in each color cartridge. When the counter detects an ink  
cartridge is running out of ink, the MFC will notify you by lighting the “Ink  
Empty” LED.  
Ink Empty LED Blinking  
Ink Empty LED On  
=
=
One or more Ink Cartridges are low.  
One or more Ink Cartridges are empty.  
The display shows you which color cartridges are low or empty. Be sure to  
follow the display prompts so you replace the color cartridges in the  
appropriate order.  
Ink Management  
When the ink cartridges are running low, you must use  
to  
begin the cartridge replacement (Steps 1–3). If the ink is empty, skip to  
Step 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
244  
Ink Management  
Press  
Press  
Press  
.
1
2
3
or  
to choose 2. REPLACE INK.  
Set  
.
If one or more ink cartridges are empty, for example Black, the screen  
displays INK EMPTY BLACK and PLS OPEN COVER.  
Open the top cover.  
4
5
Open the ink cartridge covers by pressing the clips together as shown in  
the illustration.  
Clip  
Cartridge  
Cover  
Remove the ink cartridge by lifting it up and out of the print head.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E  
245  
Open the new ink cartridge bag for the color on the display and remove  
the ink cartridge.  
7
8
Hold the new ink cartridge as shown in the illustration, and peel the  
sealing tape from the side of the ink cartridge. Carefully peel the tape  
in the direction away from you.  
opening  
Peel in the direction  
away from you!  
IMPORTANT: To prevent spilling ink and staining your hands and  
clothing, remove the sealing tape gently.  
Each color has its own correct position. Insert each new ink cartridge  
into the carriage using the color indicator on the print head as a guide.  
9
Please be careful not to press down on the switch bar.  
Close the cartridge cover until it clicks into place.  
10  
After installing the ink cartridges, close the top cover. Your MFC  
prepares for a “head cleaning” and goes online. The display screen  
prompts you to verify a new ink cartridge was inserted for each color  
you removed. Example: DID YOU CHANGE BLCK 1. YES 2. NO.  
11  
12  
If the ink cartridge you installed is not a brand new one, please make  
sure to select 2.  
1
For each new cartridge, Press  
on the dial pad to reset the ink dot  
counter for that color automatically. (The ink dot counter enables the  
MFC to notify you when a color is running low.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C H A P T E R T W E N T Y F I V E  
246  
The MFC will enter a cleaning cycle for approximately two minuts  
for each replaced cartridge. The display screen alternately shows  
CLEANING and PLEASE WAIT.  
When the MFC completes the cleaning cycle, the display returns to  
Standby mode (date and time).  
WARNING  
If ink gets in your eyes, irrigate them with water immediately and consult a  
doctor if you are concerned.  
Caution  
DO NOT remove ink cartridges if you do not need to replace them. If  
you do so, it may reduce the ink quantity and the printer will not know  
the quantity of ink left in the cartridge.  
DO NOT shake the ink cartridges, because the ink may spill when you  
take off the sealing tape.  
If ink stains your body or clothing, wash with soap or detergent immediately.  
If you install an ink cartridge in the wrong color position, you must  
clean the print head several times before you start printing, after  
correcting the cartridge installation, because the colors were mixed.  
Once you open an ink cartridge, install it in the MFC and use it up  
within six months of installation. Use unopened ink cartridges by the  
expiration date written on the cartridge package.  
DO NOT refill the ink cartridges. Attempting to use refilled cartridges  
may cause damage to the print head and will void your warranty.  
NOTE: If the INK EMPTY error message is on the display after you have  
installed ink cartridges, check that the ink cartridges are installed correctly.  
For Customer Service  
USA:  
1-800-284-4329 (voice)  
1-908-575-8790 (fax)  
1-800-853-6660 (voice)  
1-514-685-4898 (fax)  
From within Canada:  
From within Montreal: 1-514-685-6464 (voice)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G L O S S A R Y  
247  
Glossary  
Activity Report Lists information about the last 50 incoming and  
outgoing faxes. TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.  
ADF (Automatic Document Feed) Refers to the number of pages that  
can be placed in the document feeder and fed one at a time  
automatically.  
All Dial List A listing of names and numbers stored in One Touch and  
Speed Dial memory, in numerical order.  
Automatic E-Mail Printing Software application that automatically  
prints incoming e-mail messages on the MFC (on CD-ROM 1).  
automatic fax transmission Sending a fax without picking up the  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
handset or pressing  
or  
.
Automatic Redial A feature that enables your MFC to redial the last fax  
number if the original fax did not go through because the line was busy  
or there was no answer.  
Backup Print Sets your MFC to print a copy of faxes that are received  
and stored in memory.  
beeper The sound the keys make when they are pressed, an error occurs or  
a document has been received or transmitted.  
beeper volume Volume setting for the beep when you press a key or  
make an error.  
Brightness Changing the Brightness makes the whole image lighter or  
darker.  
broadcasting The ability to send the same fax message to more than one  
location.  
Call Back Message Allows you to send a fax and then leave a message  
for the other party to call you back.  
Call Reservation Allows you send a fax and then at the end of  
transmission, you can talk with the other party.  
Caller ID A service purchased from the Telephone Company that lets you  
see the number (or name) of the party calling you.  
Cancel Job Cancels a programmed job, like Delayed Fax or Polling.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G L O S S A R Y  
248  
CNG tones The special tones (beeps) sent by fax machines during auto-  
matic transmission to tell the receiving machine that they are a from fax  
machine.  
communication error (or Comm. Error) An error during fax sending  
or receiving, usually caused by line noise or static.  
Coding Method Method of coding the information contained in a  
document. All fax machines must use a minimum standard of Modified  
Huffman (MH). Your fax machine is capable of greater compression  
methods, Modified Read (MR) and Modified Modified Read (MMR), if  
the receiving machine has the same capability.  
Compatibility Group The ability of one fax unit to communicate with  
another. Compatibilty is assured between ITU-T Groups.  
Contrast Setting to compensate for dark or light documents, by lightening  
dark documents or darkening light documents.  
Cover Page Prints a page at the other party’s machine, that contains the  
sender and recipient’s name and fax number, number of pages and  
comment. You can generate an electronic cover page at the other end with  
pre-programmed information from memory or you can print a sample  
cover page to fax with your document.  
Cover Page Message The comment that is on the Cover Page. This is a  
programmable feature.  
Delayed Fax Sends your fax at a later time that day.  
Delayed Timer You can program a certain time each day that all delayed  
faxes will be sent on a first come/first served basis.  
Distinctive Ring A service purchased from the Telephone Company that  
provides another phone number on an existing phone line. The Brother  
MFC uses the new number to simulate a dedicated fax line.  
Dual Access Your MFC can scan outgoing faxes or scheduled jobs into  
memory at the same time it is sending a fax or receiving or printing an  
incoming fax.  
Easy Receive Enables your MFC to respond to CNG tones if you  
interrupt a fax call by answering it.  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) Detects errors during fax transmission  
and resends the page(s) of the document that had an error.  
Electronic Cover Page A preprogrammed cover page that is transmitted  
from the fax machine’s memory, eliminating the need for making up  
cover pages manually.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G L O S S A R Y  
249  
E-Mail Printing Software application that automatically retrieves your e-  
mail messages from your POP3 server and prints them on your MFC.  
extension phone A telephone on the fax number that is plugged into a  
separate wall jack.  
external phone A TAD (telephone answering device) or telephone that is  
plugged into the EXT jack of your MFC.  
F/T Ring Time The length of time the MFC rings (when the answer mode  
setting is FAX/TEL) to notify you to pick up a voice call that it  
answered.  
FAX/TEL mode You can receive faxes and telephone calls. Do not use  
FAX/TEL if you are using an external answering machine.  
Fax Forwarding Sends a fax received in memory to another  
preprogrammed fax number.  
Fax Storage (For MFC 7150C Only) The MFC 7150C can save up to  
100 fax pages in memory. You can print stored faxes later, or retrieve  
them from another location using Fax Forwarding, Paging, or Remote  
Retrieval functions. Remote fax options for the MFC 7160C are handled  
by the Message Center.  
fax tones The signals sent by sending and receiving fax machines while  
communicating information.  
Fine Mode Resolution is 196 x 203 dpi. It is used for small print and  
graphs.  
Function Mode The programming mode for changing the settings of your  
MFC.  
gray scale The shades of gray available for copying and faxing  
photographs.  
group number A combination of One Touch and/or Speed Dial numbers  
that are stored on a One Touch key for Broadcasting.  
ICM (incoming message) A recorded voice message received into an  
external answering machine or the MFC’s digital Message Center.  
Ink Management button Cleans the print head and/or resets the ink dot  
counter after replacing an ink cartridge.  
Interrupt Temporarily puts a waiting job on hold while you perform  
another operation.  
interval The preprogrammed time period between automatically printed  
Activity Reports. You can print Activity Reports on demand without in-  
terrupting this cycle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G L O S S A R Y  
250  
LCD (liquid crystal display) The display screen on the MFC that shows  
interactive messages during On-Screen Programming and defaults to the  
date and time when the machine is idle.  
manual fax When you press Hook —OR— Speaker Phone —OR—lift the  
handset so you can hear the receiving fax machine answer before you  
press Start to begin transmission.  
Memory Status Report Shows how much memory is being used, how  
much is left, and the type of messages in memory.  
memory usage Instructs the MFC how to allocate the memory.  
Message Center Mode (For MFC 7160C Only) You can set up your  
MFC to receive voice and/or fax messages into its memory so you can  
retrieve them remotely.  
Multi-Function Link Pro Software application Turns your MFC into  
a printer and a scanner and enables PC faxing using the MFC. (Optional  
Brother Software application)  
NetCentric FaxStorm Software application Brings together the  
power of the Internet and the reliability of fax using Internet faxing  
from your desktop.  
Next Fax Reservation Accepts the next document in the document  
feeder for transmission while the Memory is full.  
OGM (Out-Going Message) The message callers hear when you call  
your Message Center or external answering machine.  
One Touch Keys on the MFC control panel where you can store numbers  
for easy dialing. You must use a separate key for each number.  
Out of Paper Reception Receives faxes into the MFC’s memory when  
the machine is out of paper.  
Overseas Mode Makes temporary changes to the fax tones to  
accommodate noise and static on overseas phone lines.  
Paging Feature enables your fax unit to call your pager when a fax and/or  
a voice message is received into its memory.  
Pause Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in the dialing sequence  
stored on One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.  
Photo Mode A resolution setting that uses varying shades of gray for the  
best representation of photographs.  
polling The process of a fax machine calling another fax machine to re-  
trieve waiting fax messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G L O S S A R Y  
251  
printer alarm Audible alarm when the printer is not able to print.  
print reduction reduces the size of incoming faxes.  
Pulse A form of dialing on a telephone line.  
Real Time Transmission When memory is full, you can send documents  
in real time.  
remote access The ability to access your Message Center remotely from  
a touch tone phone.  
remaining jobs You can check which jobs are waiting in memory and  
cancel jobs individually.  
remote access code The four-digit code that allows you to call and  
access your Message Center from a remote location.  
remote activation allows you to transfer a fax call, answered at an  
extension phone, to the MFC.  
resolution The number of vertical and horizontal lines per inch. See:  
Standard, Super Fine and Photo.  
Ring Delay The number of rings before the MFC answers in FAX, FAX/  
TEL or MC mode.  
Ring Volume Volume setting for the MFC’s ring.  
Rotary A form of dialing on a telephone line.  
scanning The process of sending an electronic image of an original paper  
document into your computer.  
Hook  
Speaker Phone  
Speaker Volume You can set the volume of the  
and  
keys.  
speed dial A preprogrammed number for easy dialing. You must press  
the Speed dial button and then two digit code to start the dialing  
process.  
Standard resolution 98 x 203 dpi. It is used for regular size text and  
quickest transmission.  
Station ID The stored information that appears on the top of faxed pages.  
It includes the sender’s name and fax number.  
super fine resolution 392 x 203 dpi. Best for very small print and line  
art.  
TAD (telephone answering device) You can connect an external TAD  
to the EXT. jack of the MFC 7150C for TAD mode or to the MFC 7160C  
as one of the Message Center mode options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G L O S S A R Y  
252  
Tel-index An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored One Touch, Speed  
Dial and Group numbers.  
Temporary Setting You can select certain options for each fax  
transmission without changing the default settings.  
Toll Saver (For MFC 7160C Only) A Message Center setting that allows  
the MFC to answer after one ring when a message(s) was received and  
after three rings when there are no messages. The caller can hang up  
(after two rings) without paying for the call if there are no messages to  
retrieve.  
Tone A form of dialing on the telephone line used for Touch Tone  
telephones.  
transmission The process of sending documents over the phone lines  
from your MFC to the receiving fax machine.  
User Option List A printed report that shows the current settings of your  
MFC.  
Visionner PaperPortTM LE for Brother A document management  
application that enables you to view incoming faxes and scanned  
documents.  
Xmit Report (Transmission Report) A listing of each transmission,  
showing caller ID, date, time, and number of pages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
Index  
A
C
Accessories and Supplies .................................. ii  
Activity Report .......................................... 89, 90  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) ............... 56  
All Dial List ..................................................... 89  
Alternating Displays ........................................ 30  
Answer Mode .................................................. 41  
Assembly ......................................................... 10  
Auto Switch ................................................... 120  
Automatic Transmission .................................. 57  
Call Back Message .............................. 38, 65, 66  
CALL PICKUP................................................ 53  
Call Reservation .............................................. 65  
Caller ID .................................................... 53, 54  
Canceling a Scheduled Job .............................. 51  
CHECK CASSETTE ..................................... 228  
CHECK PAPER ............................................ 228  
CHECK PAPER SIZE ................................... 228  
Cleaning................................................. 242, 243  
Cleaning Cycle ................................................ 17  
Cleaning Tab .................................................. 159  
Clear .............................................................. 4, 5  
Cluster............................................................ 157  
CNG Tones ........................................................ 2  
Coated Paper.............................................. 25, 26  
Collate............................................................ 152  
Color Adjustment................................... 114, 128  
Color Copies .................................................. 105  
COMM. ERROR ........................................... 228  
Computer Requirements ................................ 130  
Connecting............................................. 7, 21, 22  
CONNECTION FAIL.................................... 228  
Contrast............................................................ 63  
Control Panel ................................................. 4, 5  
Control/Maintenance Tab .............................. 158  
Converting Telephone Wall Outlets................. 20  
COOLING DOWN........................................ 228  
Copies ............................................................ 105  
Copy Brightness ............................................ 114  
B
Backup Printing ............................................... 96  
Beeper .............................................................. 39  
Beeper Volume ................................................ 39  
Beeps ....................................................... 85, 101  
BI-DIR PRINT ........................................ 33, 145  
Bi-directional Parallel Cable ............................. 8  
Bi-Directional Printing .......................... 145, 159  
Brightness ...................................... 4, 5, 110, 123  
Broadcasting .................................................... 67  
Brother Bulletin Board ............................... i, 227  
Brother Customer Service .......................... i, 228  
Brother Fax-Back System........................... i, 227  
Brother Numbers ................................................ i  
Brother on The World Wide Web ............... i, 227  
Brother Paper ................................................... 25  
Brother Printer Driver............................. 147,149  
Brother Supplies ................................................ ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N D E X  
254  
Copy Contrast ................................................ 114  
Copy Operations ............................................ 105  
Copy Quality ......................................... 108, 110  
Copy Resolution ............................................ 4, 5  
Copying ......................................................... 105  
Corrections ...................................................... 37  
COVER OPEN .............................................. 228  
Cover Page......................... 38, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63  
Credit Card Numbers....................................... 79  
Custom Telephone Features..................... 22, 227  
Customer Service........................................ i, 246  
E
Easy Receive.................................................... 44  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) .......................... 3  
E-Mail Printing .............................................. 199  
Emergency Numbers ..................................... 216  
Energy Star Compliance ................................ 218  
Enlarge/Reduce...................................... 4, 5, 106  
Entering Text ................................................... 37  
Envelopes .......................................... 26, 27, 143  
Erasing Messages .................................. 5, 96, 97  
Error Messages .............................................. 228  
Extension Telephone.................................. 47, 48  
External Telephone .......................................... 22  
External Telephone Answering Device (TAD)  
................................................................. 3, 22  
External Two-Line TAD .................................. 20  
D
Dark Document ............................................... 63  
Date and Time.................................................. 36  
Delayed Fax ..................................................... 66  
Delayed Timer ................................................. 40  
Dial Pad Keys ................................................ 4, 5  
Dialing Mode ................................................... 35  
Difficulties ..................................................... 234  
Digital Camera............................................... 119  
DISCONNECTED ........................................ 228  
Distinctive Ringing.................................... 51, 52  
Document .................................................. 55, 63  
DOCUMENT JAM ............................... 228, 229  
Document Size and Resolution ................. 55, 56  
Document Tray ............................................ 8, 12  
Document Wire Extension ........................... 8, 11  
DOS ............................................................... 147  
DOS Printing ................................................. 147  
Double Ringing ............................................... 43  
Draft............................................................... 108  
Dual Access ..................................................... 57  
F
F/T OGM ......................................................... 44  
F/T Ring Time ........................................... 43, 47  
Fax-Back System .................................. i, 71, 227  
Fax Calling Tones .............................................. 2  
Fax Forwarding ................................. 81, 82, 104  
FAX Mode ......................................................... 2  
Fax Receive Code ............................................ 44  
Fax Receiving Tones ......................................... 2  
Fax Redial........................................................ 57  
Fax Storage ...................................................... 83  
Fax Tones........................................................... 2  
FAX/TEL Mode ..................................... 3, 43, 47  
FCC Notices .................................................. 215  
Feeder ............................................................ 151  
Fine Resolution................................................ 56  
Fixed Reduction............................................... 45  
Flexible Memory Settings ............................... 92  
Function Mode................................................. 29  
Function Selection Table ................................. 30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N D E X  
255  
Light Document ............................................... 63  
Loading Paper.......................................... 13, 141  
Location ............................................................. 9  
Logo............................................................... 156  
G
Glossary ......................................................... 247  
Glossy Paper ...................... 25, 26, 112, 122, 160  
Graphics......................................................... 156  
Gray Scale ..................................................... 223  
Group Dialing ............................................ 67, 68  
Groups for Broadcasting.................................. 75  
M
Maintenance .................................. 242, 243, 245  
Maintenance Utility Program ................ 147, 148  
Manual Dialing ................................................ 77  
Manual Feed Slot........................................... 142  
Manual Mode................................................... 41  
Manual Transmission....................................... 57  
Match Monitor ............................................... 157  
Maximum Message Time ................................ 97  
Media ............................................................. 154  
Memory ............................................... 9, 89, 103  
Memory Board (Option) ............ ii, 211, 212, 213  
MEMORY FULL Message............................ 116  
Memory Status List ......................................... 89  
Memory Storage .............................................. 40  
Message Center Mode ............................... 42, 91  
Message Indicator Light ................................ 4, 5  
Message Storage .............................................. 93  
MFC-7100 Series DOS Tools ........................ 148  
Mode .............................................................. 4, 5  
Monitor Calibration ....................................... 159  
Mono Copy .................................................... 4, 5  
MSG CTR OGM ............................................. 93  
Multi-Function Link Pro Mode ..................... 138  
Multi-purpose Sheet Feeder ............................ 11  
Multiple Copies ............................................. 106  
Multiple Resolution ......................................... 68  
H
Halftone ......................................................... 157  
Handset ........................................................ 8, 10  
Handset Volume ............................................... 39  
Handshake ......................................................... 2  
Hearing Aid Compatible ................................ 215  
HELP ......................................................... 1, 4, 5  
Hold ......................................................... 4, 5, 79  
I
ICM Recording Monitor .................................. 98  
Ink Cartridges  
................. 8, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 237, 238, 239  
Ink Dot Counter ....................................... 16, 245  
INK EMPTY ................................................. 228  
Ink Management .................................... 4, 5, 243  
Inserting Spaces ............................................... 37  
Installation ......................................................... 7  
Internet Faxing............................................... 177  
Interrupting ...................................................... 70  
Interval ............................................................... 2  
J
Jacks .......................................................... 19, 20  
N
L
NEAR EMPTY.............................................. 228  
NO RESPONSE/BUSY................................. 228  
Normal ........................................................... 154  
NOT REGISTERED...................................... 228  
NTSC ............................................................. 119  
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) ....................... 4, 5  
Left Arrow ..................................................... 4, 5  
Legal Document ............................................ 107  
Letter Document ............................................ 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N D E X  
256  
Power ............................... 9, 10, 40, 73, 173, 174  
Power Cord .................................................. 8, 10  
Power Switch ..................................... 10, 15, 220  
Print Area ......................................................... 27  
Print Head ................................................ 17, 244  
Print Quality (Testing & Improving) ............. 236  
Print Size ................................................... 26, 34  
Printer .................................................... 139, 147  
Printer Adjustment Tab .................................. 160  
Printer Driver ......................................... 140, 149  
PRINTER JAM ..................................... 228, 229  
Printer Platen ................................................. 242  
Printing ........ 48, 62, 66, 89, 90, 95,120,121, 147  
Priority Key ........................................... 4, 5, 144  
PRIVATE CALL.............................................. 53  
Pulse ................................................................ 35  
O
OGM (Outgoing Message) ........................ 23, 93  
On-Screen Programming ................................. 29  
On/OffLine Key..................................... 4, 5, 144  
One Color ................................................ 34, 115  
One-Touch Dialing ............ 57, 71, 72, 74, 78, 79  
One Touch List ................................................ 89  
Optional Memory .......................................... 211  
Orientation ..................................................... 151  
Original Type ........................................... 34, 113  
OUT-OF-AREA............................................... 53  
Overseas Mode ................................................ 64  
P
Packing List ....................................................... 8  
Packing for Shipment .................................... 239  
Paging ...................................... 81, 82, 83, 93, 99  
Paper ................................................ 25, 150, 226  
Paper jam ....................................................... 230  
Paper Size ................................................ 46, 226  
Paper Source .................................................. 151  
Paper Specifications ........................................ 26  
Paper Tab ....................................................... 149  
Paper Thickness Adjustment Lever ............... 141  
Paper Tray.......................................................... 8  
Paper Type ................................ 4, 5, 34, 96, 128  
Paper Wire Extension ........................................ 8  
Parallel Interface Cable ................................. 131  
Pause ................................................................ 79  
PBXs ................................................................ 21  
PC Printing .................................................... 147  
Photo ........................................ 56, 109, 156, 157  
Photocopies.................................................... 108  
Pick-up Roller................................................ 243  
PIN................................................................. 100  
Playing Messages .................................... 4, 5, 95  
Polling........................................................ 48, 69  
Q
Quality ..................................................... 34, 153  
Quality/Color Tab .......................................... 153  
Questions ....................................................... 234  
R
Record................................................................ 5  
Recording a Conversation ............................... 99  
Redial/Pause ............................................ 4, 5, 57  
Reduced Copies ............................................. 106  
Reduction......................................................... 45  
Remote Access Code ............................... 86, 102  
Remote Code ................................................... 47  
Remote Commands ......................................... 86  
Remote Retrieval ............................................. 85  
Replacing lnk Cartridges ............................... 243  
Reports............................................................. 89  
Reset Key....................................................... 4, 5  
Resolution .......................................... 4, 5, 56, 68  
Reverse Order ................................................ 152  
Right Arrow ................................................... 4, 5  
Ring Delay ........................................... 31, 42, 98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N D E X  
257  
Ring Volume .................................................... 40  
RJ11 Jack ......................................................... 19  
Roll Over Phone Lines .................................... 19  
Test Print.......................................... 33, 159, 236  
Test Sheet Procedure ......................................... 2  
Toll Saver......................................................... 98  
Tone/Pulse ....................................................... 35  
Tone Signals on Pulse Line ............................. 80  
Transmission Verification Report .............. 89, 90  
Transparencies ........................................... 25, 26  
Triplex Adapter ................................................ 19  
Troubleshooting ............................................. 227  
Two-Line Phone System...................... 19, 20, 21  
Type of Original ............................................ 113  
S
Safety Instructions ......................................... 219  
Scaling ........................................................... 151  
Scanner .......................................................... 242  
Scroll................................................................ 30  
Sequential Polling Receive .............................. 50  
Set .................................................................. 4, 5  
SET CARTRIDGES ...................................... 228  
Setting Up .......................................................... 7  
Shift ............................................................... 4, 5  
Shipping......................................................... 239  
Single Color ................................................... 115  
Software Installation...................................... 132  
SORT ............................................................. 106  
Speaker Low/High ......................................... 4, 5  
Speaker Phone ............................................... 4, 5  
Speaker Volume ............................................... 39  
Special Characters ........................................... 38  
Speed Dial ................................... 4, 5, 73, 74, 78  
STACK .......................................................... 106  
Specifications ................................................ 223  
Standard Resolution......................................... 56  
Start ............................................................... 4, 5  
Station ID................................... 2, 36, 37, 38, 66  
Stop ................................................................ 4, 5  
Suggestions (For Troubleshooting) ............... 227  
Super Fine Resolution ............................. 56, 154  
U
User Settings.................................................... 89  
V
VCR ............................................................... 119  
Vertical Alignment ......................................... 160  
Video Camera ................................................ 119  
Video Game ................................................... 119  
Video Printing........................ 120, 121, 122, 123  
Video Type..................................................... 122  
Vivid Color .................................................... 157  
Voice Calls ....................................................... 77  
Voice Messages........................ 91, 92, 95, 96, 97  
Volume  
Beeper .......................................................... 39  
Handset ........................................................ 39  
Ring.............................................................. 40  
Speaker ........................................................ 39  
W
T
WARMING UP ............................................. 228  
Warranties-Notice of Disclaimer ................... 221  
Windows® 3.1 or 3.11 ............................ 130, 137  
Windows® 95 or 98 ................................ 130, 137  
Windows NT® Workstation  
TAD (Telephone Answering  
Device)............................. 3, 20, 21, 22, 23, 42  
Telephone Answer Code ............................ 46, 47  
Telephone Index (Tel-index) ........................ 4, 5  
Telephone Line Cord ................................... 8, 10  
Temporary Cover Page .................................... 60  
Version 4.0 ......................................... 130, 134  
World Wide Web......................................... i, 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N D E X  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Year 2000 Compliant  
Brother is addressing the Year 2000 related  
issues for all Brother fax machines and  
multi-function centers. Our focus is to ensure  
that our bundled third party software will  
continuetoproperlyprocessdate/timedataafter  
January 1, 2000.  
Brotherfaxmachinesandmulti-functioncenters  
will function properly after January 1, 2000,  
provided that all non-Brother hardware,  
software and firmware used by our customers  
in connection or combination with Brother fax  
machines, MFCs and bundled software,  
accurately exchange date data with the  
Brother products.  
Please continue to check our Web page for  
updates at http://www.brother.com. All  
remedies will be provided to individual  
customers via software patches through  
software download or from Brother  
Customer Service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
®
Brother International Corporation  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
P.O. Box 6911  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807–0911 USA  
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.  
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,  
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, CANADA H9B 3H6  
Visit us on the World Wide Web  
http://www.brother.com  
These machines are made for use in the USA and CANADA only. We cannot recommend  
using them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that  
country and the power requirements of your Multi-Function Center may not be compatible  
with the power available in foreign countries. Using USA or CANADA models overseas is  
at your own risk and will void your warranty.  
Manufactured by Brother Industries Ltd. whose quality system  
is registered by BSI and JQA.  
*
5
UU1298001  
Printed in Japan  
BSI Certificate of registration No. FM27214  
JQA Certificate of registration No. JQA-0367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Belkin Home Theater System AP30800fc10 BLK User Manual
Billion Electric Company Network Router 6404VGP User Manual
Black Decker Saw JS680V User Manual
Casablanca Fan Company Outdoor Ceiling Fan 59106 59107 User Manual
Celestron Telescope 31058 User Manual
CFM Ventilation Hood UVCVR36 User Manual
Char Broil Charcoal Grill 11601558 A1 User Manual
Chief Manufacturing Indoor Furnishings PLP Series User Manual
Cisco Systems Network Card CompactFlash Adapter User Manual
Cisco Systems Network Card PA T3 User Manual